KIA

Sorento (2005) - Car KIA - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free Sorento (2005) KIA in PDF.

📄 326 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question
Notice KIA Sorento (2005) - page 11
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.

User questions about Sorento (2005) KIA

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Car in PDF format for free! Find your manual Sorento (2005) - KIA and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. Sorento (2005) by KIA.

USER MANUAL Sorento (2005) KIA

Now that you are the owner of a Kia Vehicle, you'll probably be asked a lot of questions about your vehicle and the company like "What the heck is a Kia?," "Who is Kia?," "What does 'Kia' mean?"

Here are some answers. First, Kia is the oldest car company in Korea. It's a company that has thousands of employees focused on building high-quality vehicles at affordable prices.

The first syllable, Ki, in the word “Kia” means “to arise from to the world” or “to come up out of to the world.” The second syllable, a, means “Asia.” So, the word Kia, means “to arise from” or “to come up out of Asia to the world.”

Enjoy your Vehicle!

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.

When you require service, remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians, recommended special tools, genuine Kia replacement parts and is dedicated to your complete satisfaction.

Because subsequent owners require this important information as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is sold.

This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual that provides important information on all warranties regarding your vehicle. If your vehicle is equipped with an audio system, you will also have a Kia Integrated Audio System manual explaining its operation. We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehicle.

Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features for its various models.

Therefore, the equipment described in this manual, along with the various illustrations, may not all be applicable to your particular vehicle. The information and specifications provided in this manual were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you have questions, always check with your Kia Dealer.

We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.

© 2005 Kia Motors Corp.

All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Kia Motors Corporation.

Printed in Korea

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION
YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE
KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVING TIPS
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX

INTRODUCTION

How to Use This Manual....1-2

Vehicle Handling Instruction 1-3

Vehicle Break-In Process 1-3

INTRODUCTION

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner's Manual can assist you in many ways. We strongly recommend that you read the entire manual. Especially, in order to prevent death or injury, at the very least, you must read the WARNING and CAUTION sections spread throughout the manual, which are easily recognized by their special markings listed.

Illustrations complement the words in this manual to best explain how to enjoy your vehicle. By reading your manual, you learn about features, important safety information, and driving tips under various road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents. A good place to start is the index; it has an alphabetical listing of all information in your manual.

Sections: This manual has eight sections plus an index. Each section begins with a brief list of contents so you can tell at a glance if that section has the information you want.

You'll find various WARNING's, CAUTION's, and NOTICE's in this manual. These WARNING's, CAUTION's and NOTICE's were prepared to enhance your personal safety and continued satisfaction with Kia vehicle. You should carefully read and follow ALL procedures and recommendations provided in these WARNING's, CAUTION's and NOTICE's.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious bodily injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in which personal injury, perhaps severe, could result if the caution is ignored.

\*NOTICE

A NOTICE indicates a situation in which damage to your vehicle could result if the notice is ignored.

VEHICLE HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an accident or vehicle rollover.

Specific design characteristics (higher ground clearance, track, etc.) give this vehicle a higher center of gravity than other types of vehicles. In other words, they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. Again, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an accident or vehicle rollover. Be sure to read the "on-pavement" and "off-road" driving guidelines, in section 5 of this manual.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS

No special break-in period is needed. By following a few simple precautions for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.

  • Do not race the engine.
  • Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time, either fast or slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.
  • Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.
  • Avoid full-throttle starts.

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

Interior and Exterior Overview 2-2

Instrument Panel Overview. 2-3

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
KIA Sorento (2005) - YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE - 1

text_image 1345 26 78910111213 1. Outside rearview mirror 2. Instrument cluster 3. Steering wheel 4. Seat 5. Rear hatch window 6. Rear hatch 7. Door 8. Power window switches 9. Rear door child safety lock 10. Shift lever 11. Parking brake lever 12. Lights 13. Spare tyre RBLA201A

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
KIA Sorento (2005) - YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE - 2

text_image 8 7 45 3 2 1 6 15 16 14 11 12 10 13
  1. Light control / Tum signals
  2. 4 wheel drive control knob (If equipped)
  3. Instrument cluster
  4. Wiper/Washer
  5. Climate control system (if equipped)
  6. Radio (if equipped)
  7. Passenger's Air Bag (If equipped)
  8. Air vent
  9. Hood release lever
  10. Ignition switch
  11. Driver's Air Bag (if equipped)
  12. Steering wheel
  13. Parking brake lever
  14. Shift lever
  15. Power outlet
    16 Glove box

RBLB201

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

Keys....3-2

Remote Keyless Entry 3-3

Immobilizer System 3-5

Door Locks 3-8

Windows 3-11 Front Cast 2-10

Front Seat 3-13 Back Seat 2-21

Rear Seal....3-21 Safety Belts....3-25

Airbags-Supplemental Restraint System 3-47

Rear Hatch. 3-58

Hood 3-60

Fuel Filler Lid 3-61

Auto Fuel Cutoff Switch 3-64

Mirrors 3-64 Interior Lights 2-68

Interior Lights 3-68

Cup Holder 3-70

Storage Compartment....3-71

Sunglass Holder 3-73

Sunroof 3-74

Roofrack 3-77 Interior Features 2-78

Interior Features 3-78 Antenna 2-82

Antenna 3-62 CD Auto Changer 3-83

Barrier Net 3-84

Luggage Net 3-87

Tonneau Cover 3-88

Luggage Center Box 3-89

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS
KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

text_image 2BLA301

The key code number is stamped on the plate attached to the key set. Should you lose your keys, this number will enable an Authorized Kia Dealer to duplicate the keys easily. Remove the plate and store it in a safe place. Also, record the code number and keep it in a safe and handy place, but not in the vehicle.

WARNING - Ignition Key

Leaving children unattended in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous even if the key is not in the Ignition. Children copy adults and they could place the key in the ignition. The ignition key would enable children to operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious bodily injury or even death. Never leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children.

CAUTION

Use only Kia original parts for the ignition key in your vehicle. If an aftermarket key is used, the ignition switch may not return to ON after START. If this happens, the starter will continue to operate causing damage to the starter motor and possible fire due to excessive current in the wiring.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a remote control device with buttons and display (no text or symbols)

If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock your doors and rear hatch from up to 5 m (15 feet) away using the key chain transmitter supplied with your vehicle.

- Lock ( ):

If you depress the corresponding button on the transmitter, all four doors and rear hatch will lock and the hazard lamp will flash once.

- Unlock ( )

If you depress the corresponding button on the transmitter, all four doors and rear hatch will unlock, the hazard lamp will flash twice and the dome light and/or rear cargo area light will come on for 30 seconds if their switches are placed in the center position.

After depressing this button, unless you open the doors within 30 seconds, all four doors will lock automatically.

- Rear hatch window unlock ( )

If you depress the corresponding button on the transmitter, the rear hatch window will unlock.

- Panic ( )

If you depress the corresponding button on the transmitter for more than 2 seconds, the horn will sound and hazard lamp will flash for about 27 seconds.

\*NOTICE

- The keyless entry system does not operate when;

  • the ignition key is in the ignition switch.
  • you exceed the operating distance limit (5m/15feet).
  • the battery in the transmitter is weak.
  • other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Check the location.
  • the weather is very cold.

- the transmitter is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

- If you have a problem with the key-less entry system, contact an Authorized Kia Dealer as soon as possible.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \*NOTICE - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a device with a circular button and a rectangular component (no text or symbols)

Battery replacement

  1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently pry open the transmitter.
  2. Remove and replace the 3-volt battery with the (+) facing up.
  3. Reassemble the transmitter.
  4. Check the transmitter operation.

CAUTION

  • Using the wrong battery can cause the transmitter to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct battery.
    • To avoid damaging the transmitter, don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it to heat or sunlight.

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM - FOR GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)

KIA Sorento (2005) - IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM - FOR GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) - 1

text_image ID Key Master Key 2BLD3027

The immobilizer system is an anti-theft device, designed to deter automobile theft.

1) ID key

This key must be used first to register a unique ID code in the ICM.

2) Master key

This key is for general use. It will open all locks on your vehicle. One side of the key has the Kia logo and the other side has the "M" symbol.

CAUTION

Don't lose your ID key or forget the password.

Always keep your ID key in a place where you remember and record your password. If you don't have both the password and ID key, consult your Authorized Kia Dealer.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

If you need additional keys or lose your keys, your Authorized Kia Dealer can make new keys if you can supply the key number and ID key.

\* NOTICE

If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.

\*NOTICE

When starting the engine, do not use the key with other immobilizer keys around. Otherwise the engine may not start or may stop soon after it starts. Keep each key separately not to have any malfunction after you receive your new vehicle.

\* NOTICE

If you want to change the secret code of Vehicle Immobilizer System, contact an Authorized Kia Dealer. After change, you and your dealer have to keep the secret code in a safe place.

CAUTION

A transponder equipped in your ignition key is very important part to deactivate the immobilizer system. So you must not give any shock on it. It could cause the failure of your immobilizer system and your vehicle's starting.

Z CAUTION

Do not change, alter or adjust the immobilizer system at your discretion. It could cause the malfunction of your immobilizer system. The malfunction resulted from the changing, altering and/or adjusting by other than Authorized Kia Dealer does not be covered by Kia Warranty.

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM - FOR DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic engine immobilizer system to prevent the risk of theft. Your immobilizer system is comprised with a transponder which equipped in the ignition key, an antenna coil equipped in the key cylinder, and a Smartra Unit. If you insert your ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the ON position, the antenna coil receives the signals from the transponder and then sends it to the Smartra Unit. The ECU checks the signal received from the Smartra Unit whether it true or not. In case of true, the engine will be started, and in case of false, the engine will not be started.

To deactivate the immobilizer system:

Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobilizer system: Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. In this condition, if anybody tries to force to drive without original ignition key, the engine is impossible to start.

\* NOTICE

When starting the engine, do not use the key with other immobilizer keys around. Otherwise the engine may not start or may stop soon after it starts. Keep each key separately not to have any malfunction after you receive your new vehicle.

\* NOTICE

If you want to change the secret code of Vehicle Immobilizer System, contact an Authorized Kia Dealer. After change, you and your dealer have to keep the secret code in a safe place.

CAUTION

A transponder equipped in your ignition key is very important part to deactivate the immobilizer system. So you must not give any shock on it. It could cause the failure of your immobilizer system and your vehicle's starting.

CAUTION

Do not change, alter or adjust the immobilizer system at your discretion. It could cause the malfunction of your immobilizer system. The malfunction resulted from the changing, altering and/or adjusting by other than Authorized Kia Dealer does not be covered by Kia Warranty.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

DOOR LOCKS

KIA Sorento (2005) - DOOR LOCKS - 1

text_image UNLOCK LOCK RBLA302 RBL

KIA Sorento (2005) - DOOR LOCKS - 2

text_image A304 RBLA305A

KIA Sorento (2005) - DOOR LOCKS - 3

text_image LOCK UNLOCK

Automatic Door Locks

Operating door locks - with key

  • Turn the key toward rear of vehicle to unlock and toward front of vehicle to lock.
  • Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.
  • All four doors and rear hatch can be locked and unlocked from the front door with the key.

Operating door locks - without key When you leave your vehicle unattended, depressing the driver's door lock button and then closing the door enables the door to lock without a key.

\* NOTICE

Always remove the ignition key, engage the parking brake, close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle

  • To lock a door, push the door lock button to the "LOCK" position.
  • To unlock a door, pull the door lock button to the "UNLOCK" position.
  • To open a door, pull the door handle outward.
  • If you pull the driver's door handle, the driver's door is automatically unlocked and opened (Except Europe).

\*NOTICE

When the door is locked, the red mark on the button is not visible.

CAUTION

The doors should always be fully closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion to prevent accidental opening of the door. Locked doors will also discourage potential intruders when the vehicle stops or slows.

WARNING - Unattended Children

Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. An enclosed vehicle can become extremely hot, causing death or severe Injury to children who cannot escape the vehicle, or to animals.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - Unattended Children - 1

text_image LOCK UNLOCK LOCK UNLOCK RBLA305B

Central Door Locks

If you press the front portion of the door lock switch, all the doors and rear hatch will lock automatically. If you press the rear portion of the door lock switch, all the doors and rear hatch will unlock automatically.

If you lock/unlock the driver door with a key or door lock button, all the doors and rear hatch will lock/unlock automatically.

If you lock/unlock the passenger door with a key, all the doors and rear hatch will lock/unlock automatically.

\* NOTICE

With the door locked, when the airbag inflates in collisions, the door may be unlocked.

Super Lock System (If equipped)

If you turn the key to the "LOCK" position for more than 3 seconds or depress the "LOCK" button on the transmitter to lock the doors, the locked doors are not unlocked by other tools except unlocking with the key or transmitter.

This feature is to prevent potential intruders from opening the door.

WARNING

Do not lock the doors by super locking with the key or the transmitter with anybody left in the vehicle. The passenger in the vehicle cannot unlock the doors with the door lock knob or the door lock switch. For example, if the door is locked with the transmitter, the passenger in the vehicle cannot unlock the door without the transmitter.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - 1

text_image LOCKED-SEE 2BLA306

Rear Door Child Safety Lock

The child safety lock is provide to help prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle. It should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

  • To lock a rear door so that it cannot be opened from the inside, push the child safety lock located on the rear edge of the door to the "LOCKED" position (toward rear of vehicle) before closing the door.
  • To open a rear door while the child safety lock is engaged, push the door lock button to the "UNLOCK" position (red mark is visible) then pull the outside door handle.

WARNING - Rear Door Locks If children accidentally open the rear doors while the vehicle is in motion, they could fall out and be severely injured or killed. To prevent children from opening the rear doors from the Inside, the rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

WINDOWS

Power Windows

The ignition switch must be in the ON position for power windows to operate. Each door has a power window switch that controls that door's window. However, the driver has a power window lock switch which can block the operation of passenger windows.

\* NOTICE

To prevent the power window system from the possibility of damage, do not open or close two windows at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \* NOTICE - 1

text_image RBLA305C

Driver's door power window controls

All windows can be opened or closed using the power window master control on the driver's door. To open a window, press down on the corresponding power window switch. To close a window, pull up on the corresponding power window switch.

Driver's window automatic-down window switch

The driver's window has an "Automatic-Down" feature. To activate the express-down feature, momentarily depress the front of the switch to the second detent position. To cancel this feature, pull up on the front of the switch and then release it or momentarily depress the front of the switch to the first detent position.

Power window timer (if equipped)

The power windows can be operated for approximately 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if the front doors are opened, the power windows cannot be operated even within the 30 seconds after the ignition key removal.

Driver's power window switch

The driver's power window switch provides two (2) separate window-down functions.

  • Depressing the driver's power window switch completely lowers the driver's window automatically (Automatic-Down). To cancel this function, pull up on the front of the switch and release it or momentarily depress the front of the switch to the first detent position.
  • Depressing the driver's power window switch partially (to the first detent) provides precise control of the window-down position. To raise/close the driver's window, pull up on the power window switch.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Driver's power window switch - 1

text_image Power window lock switch RBLA305D

Power window lock switch feature

The driver can disable the power window switches on a passenger door by depressing the power window lock switch located on the driver's door to ON. When the power window lock switch is ON, the driver's master control can not operate the passenger door power windows either.

\*NOTICE

If you notice buffeting and pulsation (wind shock) with either side window open, you should open the opposite window slightly to reduce the symptom.

WARNING - Power Windows

  • Keep the driver's door power window lock switch in the ON (depressed) position, except when someone is operating a passenger door window. Serious injury can result (especially to children) from unintentional window operation.
    • Always double check to make sure all arms, hands, and other obstructions are safely out of the way before closing a window.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - Power Windows - 1

natural_image Interior view of a car showing the dashboard, seatbelt, and dashboard panel (no text or symbols visible)

Passenger Doors Power Window Controls

To open a window, press down on the front portion of the power window switch. To close a window, pull up on the front portion of the power window switch.

WARNING - Passenger's Window

Do not allow children to play with the power windows. They may seriously injure themselves or others.

FRONT SEAT

WARNING - Driver's Seat

  • Never adjust the manual or power controls on the driver's seat while the vehicle is in motion. Doing so could cause loss of vehicular control and serious personal injury or death.
  • Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position of a seatback. Such interference may prevent the seatback from locking which could result in serious injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or collision.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

• Always ride with your seatback upright in the normal seating position and the lap portion of the safety belt, snug and low across the hips.
- In order to avoid unnecessary airbag injuries including the possibility of severe injury or death, always sit at least 250 mm (10 inches) away from the steering wheel while still being able to maintain comfortable control of your vehicle.

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car seat with side and front views, no text or symbols present

Front Seat Adjustment

Moving the front seat forward and backward

To move the seat forward or backward:

  1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever under the front edge of the seat cushion up and hold it.

  2. Slide the seat to the position you desire.

  3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place.

CAUTION

Do not place anything under the front seats. Loose objects might interfere with the seat slide mechanism or roll out from under the seat. Objects rolling around in the driver's foot area could interfere with the operation of the brake, clutch or accelerator foot pedals. It could result in serious accident.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car seat assembly with inset diagrams showing seat positioning and seat arrangement (no text or symbols)

Adjusting the front seatback recliner

To recline the seatback:

  1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the seatback recline lever located on the outside of the seat, toward the rear.

  2. Carefully lean back on the seat and adjust the back of the seat to the position you desire.

  3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place. (The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock.)

WARNING - Passengers

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt, and potentially suffering severe injury or death in the event of a collision, do not use the front seatback in a reclined position while the vehicle is in motion. If a seat is reclined, the occupant's hip could slide under or out of the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt during a collision.

If that occurs, the occupant may no longer be properly restrained, and the safety belt could apply restraint forces to the unprotected abdomen resulting in serious personal injury or death. Therefore, keep the seatbacks in a comfortably upright position whenever the vehicle is in motion.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

text_image RBLA308C

To change the height (rear portion) of the seat cushion, rotate the knob located on the outside of the seat cushion.

• To lower the seat cushion, rotate the knob toward the front of the vehicle.
• To raise the seat cushion, rotate the knob toward the rear of the vehicle.

RBLA308C RBLA256

Adjusting the height of driver seat cushion

To change the height (front portion) of the seat cushion, rotate the knob located on the outside of the seat cushion.

  • To lower the seat cushion, rotate the knob toward the front of the vehicle.
    • To raise the seat cushion, rotate the knob toward the rear of the vehicle.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Adjusting the height of driver seat cushion - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car seat with airflow indicators and motion arrows, no text or symbols present

Lumbar support (For driver's seat)

You can adjust the lumbar support by moving the lever on the side of the driver's seatback.

Pivoting the lever toward the front of the vehicle increases the lumbar support.

Pivoting the lever toward the rear of the vehicle decreases the lumbar support.

Power Driver Seat (If equipped)

The driver's seat can be adjusted by using the control knob on the right side of the seat. Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper position so as to easily control the steering wheel, pedals and switches on the instrument panel.

WARNING

The power seats are operable with the ignition OFF.

Therefore, children should never be left unattended in the car.

CAUTION

  • The driver's seat power adjust system is operated by a motor. Avoid extended operation because excessive use can cause the damage of the motor.
    • To prevent the battery from running down, avoid using the power adjuster when the engine is stopped. The adjuster uses a great amount of electric power.
  • Do not operate two knobs at the same time.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

text_image RBLA340A

Adjust seat forward and backward

Push the control knob forward or backward to move the seat to the desired position. Release the knob and the seat will lock in that position.

\* NOTICE

Prior to operating the vehicle, ensure the seat is locked securely by trying to move the seat forward or backward without using the control knob. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a person sitting in a chair with three inset diagrams showing different seat positions (no text or symbols)

Adjusting seatback angle

Rotate the upper portion of the control knob forward or backward to recline the seatback to the desired position. Release the control knob and the seatback will lock in position.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Adjusting seatback angle - 1

text_image RBLA340CR

Adjusting the height of seat cushion

Front height of seat cushion

Move the front portion of the control knob up or down to raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Adjusting the height of seat cushion - 1

text_image 4340B RBLA340D

Rear height of seat cushion

Move the rear portion of the control knob up or down to raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Rear height of seat cushion - 1

text_image Diagram illustrating human seat positioning and movement directions with labeled arrows and foot positions

Height of seat cushion
To raise or lower the seat cushion totally, pull up or push down on the center of the control knob.

A WARNING

To minimize the risk of possible severe personal injury in the event of a collision, both the driver's and passenger's seatbacks should be in a normal seating position while the car is in motion. The protection provided by the vehicle's restraint system may be reduced significantly when the seatbacks are reclined. All parts of the restraint system are designed to absorb energy in an accident and this can best be accomplished if the seatback is in a normal seating position and the seatbelt is in close proximity to the occupant.

KIA Sorento (2005) - A WARNING - 1

text_image 0:00 H M C30 AUTO/ME MC M30 2BLC451RBLA340E

Heating the Front Seats (If equipped)

The front seats are electrically heated individually when the switches and the ignition are ON. The thermostat regulates seat temperature by depressing the corresponding switch shown as above. To deactivate the heating system of front seats, depress the corresponding switch once again.

\*NOTICE

  • The seat warmer will not operate if ambient temperature is above 37 ± 3^ C ( 98.5 ± 5.5^ F ).
  • If the seat warmer doesn't work when ambient temperature is below 28 ± 3^ C ( 82.5 ± 5.5^ F ), have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \*NOTICE - 1

text_image Release lever 1BLA257

Headrest

All the seat headrests provide comfort and also help protect your head and neck in the event of certain kinds of collisions.

Hold the headrest and pull up to raise it. It will lock into position. To lower the headrest, push the release lever on the left side and push down on the headrest.

If the vehicle is equipped with tilt headrest, the front headrest will be adjusted forward to 4 positions by pulling it forward. To adjust the headrest backwards, pull it forward and release it.

WARNING - Headrests

  • Adjust the top of the headrest so that it is even with the top of your ears in order to reduce the chance of possible severe injury in the event of a collision.
  • Do not operate the vehicle with the headrest removed or improperly positioned.
  • Do not attempt to adjust the headrest while driving.

REAR SEAT

KIA Sorento (2005) - REAR SEAT - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car rear seat with seatbelt and seat rack, no text or symbols present
  • To fold the rear seatback(s) down, press the lock release button located on top of the seatbacks, then fold the seatback forward and down.
  • To raise the seatback, lift and push it firmly until it clicks into place.
  • When you return the seatback to its upright position, reposition the rear safety belts so that they can be used by rear seat passengers.

KIA Sorento (2005) - REAR SEAT - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car backseat with seat covers and side seats, no text or symbols present

Split Folding Rear Seat

The rear seatbacks fold forward to provide additional cargo space and to provide access to the cargo area.

To fold the rear seat:

  1. Pull up the strap to lift the rear portion of the seat cushion.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a garment sleeve with clips and stitching details (no text or symbols)
  1. Remove the headrest and put the headrest poles into the holes on the rear of the seat cushion.

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing seat, armrests, and dashboard (no text or symbols)
  1. Press the lock release button on the seatbacks, then fold the seat-back forward and down firmly.

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 3

natural_image Line drawing of a car rear seat and side panel, no text or symbols present

CAUTION

When you fold the rear seatback or put luggage on the rear seat cushion, you must insert the buckle into the pocket in the seatback. Doing so can prevent the buckle from being crushed by the rear seatback or luggage.

To unfold the rear seat:

  1. Lift and push the seatback backward firmly until it clicks into place.
  2. Replace the headrest on the seat-back.
  3. Push the seat cushion down firmly.

KIA Sorento (2005) - To unfold the rear seat: - 1

natural_image Diagram of a cable or connector assembly with no visible text or symbols

\* NOTICE

When returning the rear seatbacks to the upright position, remember to return the rear shoulder belts to their proper position. Routing the safety belt webbing through the rear safety belt guides will help keep the belts from being trapped behind or under the seats.

CAUTION

Do not remove the floor carpet in your vehicle. Emission control system components cause high exhaust temperatures under the floor.

WARNING - Cargo

Cargo should always be secured to prevent it from shifting and causing injury to the vehicle occupants.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car backseat with seat covers and rear seats (no text or symbols)

Center Armrest

This armrest is located in the center of the rear seatback. Pull the armrest down using the strap provided on the armrest.

SAFETY BELTS

KIA Sorento (2005) - SAFETY BELTS - 1

natural_image Diagram showing two people seated in a car with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt (If equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner safety belts. The purpose of the pretensioner is to pull the safety belt snugly against the occupant's body in certain frontal collisions.

The pre-tensioner safety belts can be activated alone or, together with the airbags, where the frontal collision is severe enough.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Pre-tensioner Seat Belt (If equipped) - 1

text_image Passenger's side 1 Driver's side airbag airbag 3 2 LA300

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. However, in certain frontal collisions, the pretensioner will also activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.

The safety belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components.

Their locations are shown in the illustration.

  1. SRS airbag warning light.
  2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
  3. SRS control module.

A WARNING

To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner, safety belt must be worn correctly.

CAUTION

  • When the pre-tensioner safety belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine powder, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. The powder is not toxic.
  • The powder may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash your hands and face thoroughly after an accident in which such powder has been released.

- If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not working properly, the airbag warning light will illuminate, since both devices are on the same electrical circuit. If the SRS airbag warning light does not blink when the ignition key is turned to "ON", or if it remains illuminated for more than 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, please have an Authorized Kia Dealer inspect the system as soon as possible.

WARNING - Pre-tensioner Repair or Replacement

  • Pre-tensioners are designed to operate once. After activation, pre-tensioner safety belts must be replaced.
  • Do not attempt to inspect, repair or replace the pre-tensioner safety belts yourself. You can permanently damage the system.

Safety Belt Restraint System

⚠ WARNING - Safety Belts

The driver and all passengers should always use the safety belts provided in order to minimize the risk of severe bodily injury.

We strongly recommend that the driver and all passengers be properly restrained at all times by using the safety belts provided with the vehicle. Proper use of the safety belts decreases the risk of severe injury or death in accidents or sudden stops. Safety belts provide the best restraint when:

  • The seatback is adjusted so the occupant is in a normal seated position.
  • The occupant is sitting upright (not reclined or bent over).

  • The lap belt portion of the safety belt is snug and low on the hips.

  • The shoulder belt portion of the safety belt is snug against the chest.
    • The knees are straight forward.

To help you remember to fasten your safety belt, a warning light will illuminate and a chime will sound.

All seats (including or except the center rear seat) have lap/shoulder belts. Inertial locks in the safety belt retractors allow all of the lap/shoulder safety belts to remain unlocked during normal vehicle operation. This allows the occupants some freedom of movement and increased comfort while using the safety belts. If a force is applied to the vehicle, such as a strong stop, a sharp turn, or a collision, the safety belt retractors will automatically lock the safety belts.

Since the inertial locks do not require a collision in order to lock up, you may become aware of the safety belts locking while braking or going around sharp corners.

Lap belt, if equipped, does not have an inertial lock so it is always in a locked condition.

Whenever possible, use the center rear seat position to install your child restraint. The center rear seat is the safest position for a child to sit in.

KIA Sorento (2005) - ⚠ WARNING - Safety Belts - 1

WARNING - Australian Design Rules

  • Seatbelts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body, and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided.
  • Seatbelts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consistent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have been designed. A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer.
  • Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water.

  • The belts should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.

  • It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has been worn in a severe impact even if damage to the assembly is not obvious.
  • Belts should not be worn with straps twisted.
  • Each belt assembly must only be used by one occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt around a child being carried on the occupant's lap.
  • No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.

⚠ WARNING - Safety Belt Usage

1) Never wear the shoulder belt under the outside arm.
2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck to put it over the Inside shoulder.
3) Never use a belt for more than one person.

WARNING - After a Collision Lap/shoulder belt assemblies may be stretched or damaged when subjected to the stress and forces of a collision. The entire restraint system should be inspected after any collision. All belts, retractors, anchors and hardware damaged by a collision should be replaced before the vehicle is operated again.

A WARNING - Safety Belt Care Safety belts should be inspected periodically for excessive wear or damage. Pull out each belt fully and look for excessive fraying, cuts, burns or other damage. Make sure that the lap/shoulder belts return smoothly and easily into the retractor. Check the latches to make sure they latch and release without interference or delay. Any belt not in good condition or in good working order should be promptly replaced.

WARNING - Twisted Safety Belts

Never drive or ride with a twisted or jammed safety belt. If you cannot untwist or unjam the safety belt, see your Kia dealer immediately.

CAUTION - Damage to Safety Belts

Never close the doors on any part of the lap or shoulder belt. It can damage the safety belt or buckle which could increase the risk of injury in case of an accident.

WARNING - Cargo Area

Passenger should never be allowed to ride in the cargo area of a vehicle. No safety belts are provided for the cargo area.

Persons riding in the vehicle without a fastened safety belt are much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury or death during an accident.

Restraint of Pregnant Women

Pregnant women should wear lap/shoulder belt assemblies whenever possible according to specific recommendations by their doctors. The lap portion of the belt should be worn AS SNUGLY AND LOW AS POSSIBLE.

WARNING - Pregnant Women Pregnant women must never place the lap portion of the safety belt over the area of the abdomen where the fetus is located or above the abdomen where the belt could crush the fetus during an impact.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

Restraint of Infants and Small Children

Small children and infants should be restrained by an approved child-restraint system to help protect them while riding in a vehicle.

Never allow a child to stand or kneel on the seat of a moving vehicle. Never allow a safety belt to be placed around both a child and an adult or around two children at the same time. It is best for children to be seated in the rear seats.

ZAUTION - Hot Metal Parts Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed during warm/hot weather; they could burn a child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.

⚠ WARNING - Children on Laps Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms in a moving vehicle.

Even a very strong person cannot hold onto a child in the event of even a minor collision.

Many companies manufacture child restraint systems (often called child seats) for infants and small children. An acceptable child restraint system must always satisfy the Safety Standards of your country. Make sure that any child-restraint system you use in your vehicle is labelled as complying with those safety standards.

The child-restraint system should be chosen to fit both the size of the child and the size of the vehicle seat. Be sure to follow any instructions provided by the child-restraint system manufacturer when installing the child-restraint system.

Restraint of Larger Children

As children grow, they may need to use new child-restraint systems, including larger child seats or booster seats, which are appropriate for their increased size.

A child who has outgrown available child-restraint systems should use the belts provided in the vehicle. When seated in the rear outboard seats, the child should be restrained by the lap/shoulder belt.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child's neck or face, try placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck they may need to be returned to a child restraint system. In addition, after-market devices are available from independent manufacturers which help pull the shoulder belt down and away from the child's face or neck.

WARNING - Shoulder belts on Small Children

- Never allow a shoulder belt to be in contact with a child's neck or face while the vehicle is in motion.

- If safety belts are not properly worn and adjusted, there is a risk of death or serious injury to such a child.

Child Restraint System (If equipped)

For small children and babies, the use of a child seat or infant seat is strongly recommended. This child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. It is further recommended that the seat be placed in the vehicle's rear seat since this can make an important contribution to safety.

Children riding in the car should sit on the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger children should use one of the seat belts provided.

You are required by law to use safety restraints for children. If small children ride in your vehicle you must put them in a child restraint system (safety seat).

Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured. For small children and babies, a child seat or infant seat must be used. Before buying a particular child restraint system, make sure it fits your car and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child restraint system.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Child Restraint System (If equipped) - 1

text_image 1BLA204

WARNING

- A child restraint system must be placed in the rear seat. Never install a child or infant seat on the front passenger's seat.

Should an accident occur and cause the passenger airbag to deploy, it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. Thus, only use a child restraint in the rear seat of your vehicle.

- Since a safety belt or child restraint system can become very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle, be sure to check the seat cover and buckles before placing a child there.

- When the child restraint system is not in use, store it in the trunk or fasten it with a safety belt so that it will not be thrown forward in the case of a sudden stop or an accident.

- Children who are too large to be in a child restraint should sit in the rear seat and be restrained with the available lap/shoulder belts. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat.

(Continued)

(Continued)

  • Always make sure that the shoulder belt portion of the outboard lap/shoulder belt is positioned midway over the shoulder, never across the neck or behind the back. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. The lap belt portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the center seat lap belt must always be positioned as low as possible on the child's hips and as snug as possible.
  • If the seat belt will not properly fit the child, we recommend the use of an approved booster seat in the rear seat in order to raise the child's seating height so that the seat belt will properly fit the child.

  • Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.

  • Never use an infant carrier or child safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback; it may not provide adequate security in an accident.
  • Never allow a child to be held in a person's arms while they are in a moving vehicle, as this could result in serious injury to the child in the event of an accident or a sudden stop. Holding a child in a moving vehicle does not provide the child with any means of protection during an accident, even if the person holding the child is wearing a seat belt.

Installation on the rear seats

\*NOTICE

  • Before installing the child restraint system, read the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer.
  • If the seat belt does not operate as described, have the system checked immediately by your authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING

  • Do not install any child restraint system in the front passenger seat. Should an accident occur and cause the passenger airbag to deploy, it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. Therefore, only use a child restraint system in the rear seat of your vehicle.
  • If the child restraint seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being seriously injured or killed in a collision greatly increases.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical component or assembly (no text or symbols visible)

Installing a child restraint system by lap/shoulder belt (on the outboard or center rear seat)

To install a child restraint system on the outboard or center rear seats, do the following:

  1. Place the child restraint system in the desired position.
  2. Extend the shoulder/lap belt from its retractor.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car seat with hands adjusting the seatbelt (no text or symbols)
  1. Route the lap/shoulder belt through the restraint according to the seat manufacturer's instructions.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - 3

natural_image Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a hand resting on the seat (no text or symbols)
  1. Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt to take up any slack. After installation of the child restraint system, try to move it in all directions to be sure the child restraint system is securely installed.

If you need to tighten the belt, pull more webbing toward the retractor. When you unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to retract, the retractor will automatically revert back to its normal seated passenger emergency locking usage condition.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - 4

natural_image Line drawing of a child sitting in a seatbelt, no text or symbols present

Installing a child restraint system by lap belt (on the center rear seat) (If equipped)

To install a child restraint system on the center rear seats, do the following:

  1. Place the child restraint system on the center rear seat.

  2. Extend the latch plate tongue of the lap belt.

  3. Route the lap belt through the restraint according to the seat manufacturer's instructions.

  4. Buckle the seat belt and adjust the lap belt for a snug hold on the child restraint by pulling on the loose end of the belt. After installation of the child restraint system, try to move it in all directions to be sure the child restraint system is securely installed.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

text_image Tether Anchor Cover Tether Strap Hook Child Restraint Hook Holders 2BLD348 2

Securing a child restraint seat with "Tether Anchor" system

Child restraint hook holders are located on the floor behind the rear seats.

  1. Open the tether anchor cover on the floor behind the rear seats.
  2. Remove the tonneau cover (if equipped).

KIA Sorento (2005) - Securing a child restraint seat with "Tether Anchor" system - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car seat with rear seats and seatbelt, no text or symbols present
  1. Route the child restraint seat strap over the seatback.

For vehicles with adjustable headrest, route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback.

  1. Connect the tether strap hook to the belonging child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the seat.
  2. Replace the tonneau cover (if equipped).

KIA Sorento (2005) - Securing a child restraint seat with "Tether Anchor" system - 2

text_image To child restraint Bolt 33 mm thread length Anchor Spacer Set washer Trim Panel Front of vehicle

The anchor fitting package consists of:

  • Bolt: 5/16 inch - 18 unc 33 mm thread length
  • Spacer: 5 mm thickness
  • Set washer: 0.7mm thickness
    • Anchor fitting: Comforms to ADR 34/01

KIA Sorento (2005) - Securing a child restraint seat with "Tether Anchor" system - 3

text_image To child restraint Upper tether strap Attachment clip Anchor Attachment bolt Trim panel Front of vehicle RBLD302 2

WARNING - Australian Design Rule

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Securing a child restraint system with "ISOFIX" system and "Tether Anchorage" system

ISOFIX is a standardised method of fitting child seats that eliminates the need to use the standard adult seat belt to secure the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more secure and positive location with the added benefit of easier and quicker installation.

An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if it has vehicle-specific approval in accordance with the requirements of ECE-R44. For your Kia, the "Kia ISOFIX GR1 / Kia Duo" and the "Römer Duo ISOFIX / Britax Duo ISOFIX" is approved according to the requirement ECE-R44. This seat has been tested extensively by Kia and is recommended for your Kia.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Securing a child restraint system with "ISOFIX" system and "Tether Anchorage" system - 1

text_image ISOFIX Anchor

At present, this seat is the only one complying with that provision. In case that other manufacturers will furnish proof of a respective certification, Kia is going to evaluate this seat carefully and will give a recommendation provided that seat complies to the law. Please ask your Kia dealer in this respect.

On each side of the rear seat, between the cushion and backrest, are located a pair of ISOFIX anchorage points together with a top tether mounting on the floor behind the rear seats. During the installing, the seat has to be engaged at the anchorage-points in a way you can hear it clicking (check by pulling!) and has to be fixed with the Top Tether-belt on the belonging point on the floor behind rear seats. The installing and the use of a child-seat has to be done according to the installing-manual, which is added to the ISOFIX-seat.

\* NOTICE

An ISOFIX-child-seat can only be installed if the seat has a vehicle-specific approval according to ECE-R44. Before using the ISOFIX-child-seat, which was bought for other car, ask your Kia-dealer whether this seat-type is approved and recommended for your Kia.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \* NOTICE - 1

text_image e BGQ03102

To secure the child restraint seat

  1. To engage the child restraint seat to the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX anchor. Listen for the audible "click" sound.

  2. Connect the tether strap hook to the child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the seat. Refer to "Securing a child restraint seat with the "Tether Anchorage" system" on page 3-36.

WARNING

- Do not install a child restraint seat at the center of the rear seat using the vehicle's ISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are only provided for the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX anchors by attempting to attach a child restraint seat in the middle of the rear seat to the ISOFIX anchors. In a crash, the child restraint seat ISOFIX attachments may not be strong enough to secure the child restraint seat properly in the center of the rear seat and may break, causing serious injury or death.

  • Do not mount more than one child restraint to a child restraint lower anchorage point. The Improper Increased load may cause the anchorage points or tether anchor to break, causing serious injury or death.
  • Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child restraint seat only to the appropriate locations shown in the illustration.
    • Always follow the installation and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.

Child seat restraint suitability for seat position

Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.

Age GroupSeating position
Front PassengerRear Outboard RearCenter
0 : Up to 10 kg(0 - 9 months)XUUF
0+ : Up to 13 kg(0 - 2 years)XUUF
I : 9 kg to 18 kg(9 months - 4 years)XU, L1UF
II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg(4 - 12 years)XUUF

U : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
UF: Suitable for forward-facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
L1 : Suitable for "Römer ISOFIX GR1" approved for use in this mass group (Approval No: E1 R44-03301133)
X : Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

natural_image Silhouette of a person holding a crossbar, symbolizing resistance or safety (no text or symbols present)

Safety Belt Warning Light

As a reminder to the driver and passenger, the safety belt warning light will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON regardless of belt fastening.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Safety Belt Warning Light - 1

natural_image Illustration of a person sitting in a car seatbelt, holding a seatbelt with a downward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Lap/Shoulder Belt

To fasten the lap/shoulder belt :

  1. Grasp the buckle and tongue plate.
  2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt out from the retractor.

KIA Sorento (2005) - To fasten the lap/shoulder belt : - 1

natural_image Illustration of a person sitting in bed with a medical device inserted, no text or symbols present
  1. Insert the tongue plate into the open end of the buckle until an audible "click" is heard, indicating the belt is locked in the buckle.

KIA Sorento (2005) - To fasten the lap/shoulder belt : - 2

text_image Take up slack Too high Keep as low on hip bone as possible 2BLA373 2BL
  1. Position the lap portion of the belt across your lap as LOW ON THE HIPS as possible to reduce the risk of sliding under it during an accident. Adjust the belt to a SNUG FIT by pulling up on the shoulder portion of the safety belt. The belt retractor applies tension to the belt in order to take up excess webbing automatically and to maintain tension on the belt. For maximum safety, do not put any excess slack into the safety belt.

KIA Sorento (2005) - To fasten the lap/shoulder belt : - 3

text_image Type A R320.2B 1732.0 Type B
  1. Adjust the shoulder anchor position to your size. To raise the anchor position, push the anchor up. To lower the anchor position, press the button and slide the anchor down. After adjustment, make sure the anchor is locked in position.

A WARNING

  • The seatbacks should always remain in a comfortable, upright position while the vehicle is in motion. The safety belt system will provide the most protection with the seatbacks in an upright position.
  • Never wear the shoulder portion of the safety belt under the outside arm or behind the back.
  • Never wear the shoulder portion of the safety belt across the neck or face.
  • Wear the lap portion of the safety belt as low on the hips as possible. Be sure the lap belt fits snugly around the hips. Never wear the lap belt over your waist.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

  • Never drive or ride with a twisted or jammed safety belt. If you cannot untwist or unjam the safety belt, see the nearest Kia dealer immediately.
  • Never use a single belt to restrain more than one person at a time.

Failure to follow these warnings will increase the risk and severity of injury in an accident.

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

natural_image Illustration showing a person using a seatbelt to lift another, with no text or symbols present.

To unfasten the lap/shoulder belt: Press the release button on the buckle and allow the belt to slowly retract.

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 2

text_image Length 2BLA376

Lap Belt (If equipped)

To fasten the lap belt:

  1. Grasp the buckle end and pull it low over the abdomen.

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 3

natural_image Line drawing of a person adjusting a mechanical component with a black arrow indicating force (no text or symbols)
  1. Insert the tongue plate into the open end of the buckle until an audible "click" is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted.

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 4

text_image Adjust to a snug fit A378
  1. Grasp the free portion of the belt webbing and pull until the belt is snug over the hips and lower abdomen. If it becomes necessary to lengthen or shorten the belt, hold the latch plate tongue at right angles to the webbing and pull.

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 5

text_image Too high Keep as low on hip bone as possible 2BLA379
  1. Make sure that the belt is placed as LOW ON THE HIPS as possible.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a person adjusting a small object with a black arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

To unfasten the lap belt:

Press the release button on buckle.

WARNING - Lap Belt

Be sure the lap belt is positioned snugly around the hips, and not on the waist. Failure to position the lap belt snugly around the hips will increase the chance and severity of injury in the event of a collision.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - Lap Belt - 1

text_image Diagram showing a person using a tool to interact with an electrical plug, with an arrow indicating the process.

3 Point Rear Center Belt (If equipped)

To fasten the rear center belt

  1. Extract the tongue plates from the holes on the belt assembly cover and slowly pull the tongue plates out from the retractor.

CAUTION - Cargo

Be sure that the cargo is securely loaded in the rear cargo area. Doing not so may damage the rear center safety belt in sudden stop or certain collisions.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - Cargo - 1

text_image (A) (D1) (D2) (3) 2BLB303A2BLB302A
  1. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the open end of the buckle (C) until an audible "click" is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - Cargo - 2

text_image R 2BLC305 2
  1. Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert the tongue plate (B) into the open end of the buckle (D) until an audible "click" is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure the belt is not twist.

There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips, if you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

WARNING

When using the rear seat center belt, you must lock all tongue plates and buckles. If any tongue plate or buckle is not locked, it will increase the chance of injury in the event of collision.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a hand pressing down on a small electronic component with arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

To unfasten the rear center belt

  1. Press the release button on the buckle (D) and remove the tongue plate (B) from the buckle (D).

  2. Press the release button on the buckle (C) and remove the tongue plate (A) from the buckle (C)

The belt webbing will retract automatically.

  1. Insert the tongue plates into the holes and hang the tongue plates on the hooks on the belt assembly cover.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

Proper Use and Care of the Safety Belt System

To ensure that the safety belts provide the maximum protection, please follow these instructions:

  • Use the belts at all times - even on short trips.
  • If the safety belt is twisted, straight-en it prior to use.
  • Keep sharp edges and damaging objects away from the belts.
  • Periodically inspect belt webbing, anchors, buckles and all other parts for signs of wear and damage. Replace damaged, excessively worn or questionable parts immediately.

• To clean the belt webbing, use any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.
- Do not bleach or dye on the webbing. This may weaken the webbing and allow it to fail in a collision.
- Do not make modifications or additions to the safety belt.
- Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door when you close it.

AIRBAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

What your airbag system does Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), which includes an airbag for the driver, if equipped, another airbag for the front seat passenger and, side curtain airbags. The airbag for the driver is in the steering wheel and is designed to help restrain the forward movement of the driver's head and chest in certain frontal collisions. The passenger airbag is designed to help restrain the forward movement of the passenger head and chest in certain frontal collisions. The side curtain airbags help to supplement the protection offered by the safety belt and side impact beams in side collisions.

What your airbag system does not do The front airbag system (for driver and passenger) is designed to supplement or add to the protection provided to properly belted occupants in moderate to severe frontal collisions. The side curtain airbag system is designed to supplement, or add to the protection provided to properly belted occupants in certain side impact collisions. Keep in mind that neither airbag is a substitute for the driver's or passenger's safety belt and it neither provide restraint to the lower body.

Why didn't my airbag go off in a collision?

There are many types of accidents in which the airbag cannot provide additional protection. These include side or rear impacts, rollovers, and second or third impacts in multiple-impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts. However, if your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, the side curtain airbag can provide additional protection in certain side impact collisions.

Remember, airbags are only designed to inflate when the impact would throw the occupant into the airbags - front airbags are inflated in certain frontal impact collisions generally from a little to the left to a little to the right of straight ahead. If your vehicle is equipped with only front airbags, the airbags may not deploy if your vehicle is struck from the side or is involved in a rollover. Side curtain airbags usually inflate in certain side impact collisions, generally from a little to forward to a little to the rear of both sides of the vehicle.

In other words, just because your vehicle is damaged and even if it is totally unusable, don't be surprised that the airbag(s) did not inflate.

The importance of using safety belts There are four very important reasons to use safety belts even with an airbag supplemental restraint system. They:

  • help keep you in the proper position (away from the airbag) when it inflates.
  • reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side or rear impact collisions, because a front airbag is not designed to inflate in such situations and even a side curtain airbag is designed to inflate only in certain side impact collisions.
  • reduce the risk of harm in frontal or side collisions which are not severe enough to actuate the airbag supplemental restraint system.
  • reduce the risk of being thrown from your vehicle.

⚠ WARNING - Airbags & Safety Belts

• Always wear your safety belt. It can help keep you away from the air bags during heavy braking just before a collision.
- Your vehicles airbags provide the most protection when the vehicle occupants are seated away from the front airbags as the collision starts. Your safety belt can help keep your occupants away from the front airbags during heavy braking just before a collision.

  • Front airbags are designed to inflate only in severe frontal collisions and will generally not provide protection in side or rear impacts, rollovers or less severe frontal collisions. Even the side airbags are designed to inflate only in certain side impact collisions. They will not provide protection from later impacts in a multi-impact collision.
  • If your vehicle has been subjected to flood conditions (e.g. soaked carpeting/standing water on the floor of the vehicle, etc.) or if your vehicle has become flood damaged in any way, do not attempt to start the vehicle or put the key in the ignition before disconnecting the battery. This may cause airbag deployment, which could result in serious personal injury or death. Have the vehicle towed to an authorized Kia dealer for inspection and necessary repairs.

Airbag System Components

The main components of your SRS are:

  • One airbag in the steering wheel for the driver and another airbag in the dashboard for the front passenger (if equipped). The side airbags (if equipped) are located in both sides of the headliner.
  • A diagnostic system that continually monitors the system operation.
  • An indicator light to warn you of a possible problem with the system.
  • Emergency power backup in case your car's electrical system is disconnected in a crash.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Airbag System Components - 1

text_image Driver's airbag 2BLA422B Passenger's airbag RBLA002A Side airbag 2BLD320A/2BLA371A 3-49

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

To indicate that your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the airbag covers on the steering wheel, dashboard and/or on both sides of the headliner are marked with "SRS AIRBAG".

How the Airbag System Works

The driver's airbags are stored in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger's airbag is stored in the dashboard above the glove box.

In certain frontal collisions, your air bags will instantly inflate to help protect you from serious physical injury or death.

There is no single vehicle speed at which the airbags will inflate. Generally, airbags are designed to inflate in certain frontal collisions. The airbag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) reacts to the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors determine whether the sensors send out an electronic deployment/inflation signal. Whether the airbags will inflate depends on a number of factors including vehicle speeds, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle hits in the collision.

The airbags are designed to inflate instantly in the event of a certain frontal collisions in order to help protect the driver and passenger from serious physical injury.

The front airbags will completely inflate and deflate in less than 1/10 of one second. The speed of inflation and deflation protects the driver's ability to operate the vehicle. This is important in crashes where a vehicle continues to move after an impact and the driver still has some control of the vehicle's steering, braking, throttle and/or transmission systems.

It is virtually impossible for you to see the front airbags inflate during an accident. It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated airbags hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.

In order to help provide protection in a severe collision, the airbags must inflate rapidly. However, that speed also causes the airbags to expand with a great deal of force. The speed of this inflation is necessary to reduce the likelihood of serious or life-threatening injuries and is thus a necessary part of airbag design. However, airbag inflation could also cause injuries which normally can include facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones.

KIA Sorento (2005) - How the Airbag System Works - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a person seated in a car, holding a seatbelt (no text or symbols)

There are even circumstances under which contact with the steering wheel airbag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the steering wheel.

WARNING - Airbag Injuries

  • You must always sit as far back from the steering wheel airbag as possible, while still maintaining a comfortable seating position for good vehicle control, in order to reduce the risk of injury or death in a collision.
  • Never place objects over the airbag storage compartments or between the airbags and yourself. Due to the speed and force of the airbag inflation, such objects could hit your body at high speed and cause severe bodily injury and even death.
  • Do not put stickers, ornaments, etc. on the steering wheel cover, dashboard and both sides of the headliner. These may interfere with the airbag's deployment.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

Noise and Smoke

When the airbags inflate, they make a loud noise and they leave powder which may appear to be smoke in the air inside of the vehicle. This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the airbag inflator.

After the airbags inflate, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing due both to the contact by your chest with both the safety belt and the airbag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder.

WE STRONGLY URGE YOU TO OPEN YOUR DOORS AND/OR WINDOWS AS PROMPTLY AS POSSIBLE AFTER IMPACT IN ORDER TO REDUCE DISCOMFORT AND PREVENT PROLONGED EXPOSURE TO THE SMOKE AND POWDER.

WARNING - Hot Metal Parts When the airbags deploy, the airbag inflators in the steering wheel and/or in the dashboard and/or in both sides of the headliner over the rear quarter glasses are very hot. To prevent injury, do not touch the airbag storage area's internal components immediately after an airbag has inflated.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Noise and Smoke - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a person sitting in a chair, holding a tool near their head (no text or symbols)

The Importance of The Passenger Being Properly Seated

The front seat passenger's airbag is much larger than the driver's airbag and inflates with considerably more force. It can seriously hurt or kill a passenger who is not in the proper position and wearing the safety belt properly.

The front passenger should always move his seat as far back as practical and sit well back in the seat. It is essential that the front passenger always wear his safety belt, even when driving in a parking lot or up a driveway into a garage.

The reason for this is that in most frontal impacts there is substantial pre-impact braking which tends to throw the occupants forward. If the right front passenger is not using his safety belt, he will be directly in front of or even touching the airbag storage compartment when inflation occurs. In that situation, death or severe injury is possible.

WARNING - Pre-Impact Braking

Pre-impact braking could throw an unbelted passenger toward or onto the front airbag storage compartment. In the collision, the front airbag would rapidly inflate and possibly severely injure or kill the unbelted occupant.

WARNING - Front Passengers

- Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. A rear-facing child restraint would be positioned too close to the airbag. If the airbag deploys, it would impact the rear-facing child restraint, causing serious or fatal injury.

- Failure to observe the instructions provided with the child restraint system could increase the risk and/or severity of injury in an accident.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - Front Passengers - 1

natural_image Line drawing of two people seated in a car, viewed from the side (no text or symbols)

Side Curtain Airbag (If equipped)

This side curtain airbag system consists of inflatable curtains located along both sides of the roof rail, stretching from the rear edge of the rear side door windows to center of both front side windows. It is designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.

If the side curtain airbag deploys, it remains inflated for approximately 3 seconds.

The side curtain airbag deployment occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact.

WARNING

- The side curtain airbags are not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in most rollover situations.

- Never try to open or repair any components of the side curtain airbag system. This should be done only by an Authorized Kia dealer.

- The side curtain airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. The side curtain airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- In order for the side curtain airbag to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants and both outboard rear seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened; adults using the seat belt and children using the proper child restraint system. Only adults should sit in the front seats. Children must never be allowed in the front passenger seat. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an accident.

- When children are seated in the rear outboard seats in which side curtain airbags are equipped, be sure to put the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and secure the child restraint system to be locked in position.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Inflation of side curtain airbag could cause serious injury or death due to the expansion impact.

  • When children are seated in the rear outboard seats, they must be seated in the proper child restraint system. Make sure to put the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and secure the child restraint system to be locked in position.
  • Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on the seats where side curtain airbags are equipped.

KIA Sorento (2005) - (Continued) - 1

natural_image Silhouette of a person running with a stick (no text or symbols)

Airbag Warning Light

The purpose of the airbag warning light in your instrument panel is to alert you of a potential problem with your Airbag - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

Have the system checked if:
- The light does not blink briefly when you turn the ignition ON.
- The light stays ON after the engine starts.
- The light comes ON while you are driving.

Supplemental Restraint System Service

Your Supplemental Restraint System is virtually maintenance-free. There are no parts which you can service.

You must have the system serviced under the following circumstances:

  • If an airbag ever inflates, the airbag must be replaced. Do not try to remove or discard the airbag by yourself. This must be done by an authorized Kia dealer or a qualified service technician.
  • If the airbag warning indicator light alerts you of a problem, have the airbag system checked as soon as possible. Otherwise, your airbag might not inflate when you need it.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

The SRS is virtually maintenance free and there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. The entire SRS system must be inspected by an authorized Kia dealer in 10 years after the vehicle manufacture date.

Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel must be performed by a qualified Kia technician. Improper handling of the airbag system may result in serious personal injury.

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

text_image Inside of hood WARNING DO NOT TAMPER WITH OR DISCONNECT THE AIR BAG SYSTEM WINDING. You could course the air bag to injure at the system may list to operate which may result in severe personal injury. Refer to Servicio Manual for further information. AVERTISSEMENT ME PAS MANIPULER NO DÉBRANCHER LE CABLEG ÉLECTROQUE DO DESPÔTIF DE UN COUSSIONS DE SECURITÉ. Ceisé journal gonister le coumiser de accidente ou le motre hors service de or directors des bloissures. Vors le manuel de opération. 2BLA358

WARNING - SRS

Modifications

  • Do not modify your steering wheel or any other part of the airbag system. Modification could make the system ineffective.
  • Do not work on the system's components or wiring. This could cause the airbags to inflate inadvertently, possibly seriously injuring someone. Working on the system could also disable the system so that the airbags do not deploy in a collision.

Airbag Warning Label

To remind you of the dangers of the airbag, airbag warning labels are adhered to the driver's and passenger's sunvisors.

Note that these warnings focus on the risk to children, Kia also wants you to be aware of the risks which adults are exposed to. Those have been described in previous pages.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Airbag Warning Label - 1

text_image WARNING DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY CAN OCCUR. • Can share 12% of cases can be killed by the air bag. • The accident shall be the accident, but the other is broken. • The person has a very much much much of the air bag. • She has a back to his hand in the bag. • A family will take a full time on the body. This is not allowed. AS2B03037 WARNING TO AVOID SERIOUS INJURY • Formalization in safety protection in all types of animals, you must be able to avoid any injury. • Do not take from necessary problems or if he is dead. • The person may pick someone else if he is dead and yourself. • See the Company's Manual for further information on explanations. 2BLA350

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

REAR HATCH

KIA Sorento (2005) - REAR HATCH - 1

Opening the Rear Hatch

To open the rear hatch from the outside:

  1. Insert the door key into the key cylinder and turn it counterclockwise. You can also unlock the latch (but not release it) with the power door lock system.
  2. Reach under the license plate light shield and pull the rear hatch handle to release the latch.

  3. Pull the rear hatch back and up to open.

Make certain that you close the rear hatch door before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur to the rear hatch lift cylinders and attaching hardware if the rear hatch door is not closed prior to driving.

CAUTION

The rear hatch swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the hatch.

WARNING - Rear Hatch

  • Check to be sure the rear hatch is completely closed before driving. If the rear hatch is open, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle.
  • Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no restraints are available. To avoid injury in the event of an accident or sudden stops, occupants should always be properly restrained.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - Rear Hatch - 1

text_image RBLA305E 2

Opening the Rear Hatch Window

To open the rear hatch window, press the rear hatch window release button and raise the rear hatch window at the rear of the vehicle.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Opening the Rear Hatch Window - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing the hood and seat area (no text or symbols)

The window will raise completely by itself after it has been raised halfway.

To close the rear hatch window, lower and push down the rear hatch window firmly. Make sure that the rear hatch window is securely fastened.

You can also open the rear hatch window by inserting the key into the rear hatch key cylinder and turning the key to the right twice within 3 seconds and raising it.

\*NOTICE

If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust gases may enter the vehicle resulting in serious illness or damage to the occupants.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

HOOD

KIA Sorento (2005) - HOOD - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing the door, vent, and seat (no text or symbols)

Opening the Hood:

  1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Opening the Hood: - 1

natural_image Front and side technical line drawing of a car (no text or symbols)
  1. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the hood until the secondary latch catches then push the secondary latch (located under the hood at the center of the radiator grille) to the right.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Opening the Hood: - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car showing the hood open and side profile (no text or symbols)
  1. Raise the hood. It will raise completely by itself after it has been raised halfway.

Closing the Hood:

Check the area under the hood to make certain all filler caps are in place and that all loose items have been removed.

To close the hood, lower the hood then push down to properly lock in place.

CAUTION

Before closing the hood, make sure that all parts and tools have been removed from the engine area and that everyone is clear of the hood opening.

Do not leave gloves or cloths in the engine room. Doing so may cause fire by engine heat.

FUEL FILLER LID
KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing the door, seatbelt, and dashboard (no text or symbols)
  1. To open a fuel filler lid, depress on the release button located on the driver's door.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 2

text_image OPEN CLOSE A318A
  1. To remove the cap, turn it counterclockwise.
  2. Refuel the fuel tank.
  3. To install the cap, place it on the fuel filler neck and turn it clockwise until it "clicks". This indicates that the cap is securely tightened.
    If the fuel filler lid does not open in cold weather because the area around it is frozen, push or lightly tap the lid.
    In special region, the fuel filler neck for gasoline engine is designed to prevent filling the fuel tank with anything but unleaded fuel.

WARNING - Refueling

If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can cause serious injuries. Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before completely removing the cap.

WARNING

Automotive fuels are flammable/explosive materials. When refueling, please note the following guidelines carefully. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in severe personal injury, severe burns or death by fire or explosion.

• Before refueling always note the location of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, at the gas station facility.

- Before touching the fuel nozzle or fuel filler cap, you should eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching another metal part of the front of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source.

- Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refueling. Do not touch, rub or slide against any item or fabric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.) capable of producing static electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors resulting in explosion. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source.

- When using a portable fuel container be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling has begun, contact with the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete.

Use only portable fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline.

- Do not use cellular phones around a gas station or while refueling any vehicle. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cellular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. If you must use your cellular phone use it in a place away from the gas station.

- When refueling always shut the engine off.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Always insure that the engine is OFF before and during refueling. Once refueling is complete, check to make sure the fuel filler cap and door are securely closed, before starting the engine.

  • Do not light any fire around a gas station. DO NOT use matches or a lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle while at a gas station especially during refueling. Automotive fuel is highly flammable and can, when ignited, result in explosion by flames.
  • If a fire breaks out during refueling, leave the vicinity of the vehicle, and immediately contact the manager of the gas station or contact the police and local fire department. Follow any safety instructions they provide.

\* NOTICE

  • Make sure to refuel with gasoline only for the gasoline engine vehicles and diesel fuel only for the diesel engine vehicles.
  • Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is securely closed after refueling.
  • If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a genuine Kia cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system. Correct replacement caps are available at authorized Kia dealers.
  • Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.
  • If the fuel filler lid will not open in cold weather because the area around it is frozen, push or lightly tap the lid.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \* NOTICE - 1

text_image 2BLA614D

Manual Fuel Filler Lid Release

If the fuel filler lid is not open by using the remote button, open it by pulling out the emergency handle which is located in the right side storage in a cargo area.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

AUTO FUEL CUTOFF SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED)
KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a sewing machine needle with a downward arrow indicating force or adjustment (no text or symbols)

The auto fuel cutoff switch is located on the passenger's side of the engine compartment. In the event of a collision or sudden impact, the auto fuel cutoff device cuts off the fuel supply. If this device is activated, it must be reset by pressing in on the top of the switch before the engine can be restarted.

WARNING

Before resetting the auto fuel cut-off switch, the fuel line should be checked for fuel leaks.

3-64

MIRRORS

Outside Rearview Mirror

Be sure to adjust mirror angles before driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearview mirrors. The mirrors can either be adjusted remotely with the control levers or remote switch, depending on the type your vehicle has. The mirror heads can be folded back to prevent damage when using an automatic car wash or passing in a narrow street.

\* NOTICE

Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the surface of the glass. If ice should restrict movement of the mirror, do not force the mirror for adjustment. To remove ice, use a de-icer spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with very warm water.

CAUTION

  • The outside rearview mirrors are convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.
  • Use your interior rearview mirror or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car door and side panel with mounting clips (no text or symbols)

Manual remote control (if equipped)

To adjust an outside mirror, move the control lever which is located at the forward inside area of the window frame.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 2

text_image ← C 0 N RBLA255F

*NOTICE

The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is depressed. Do not depress the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.

Electric remote control (if equipped)

The electric remote control mirror switch, located on the driver's door, allows you to adjust the position of the left and right outside rearview mirrors. To adjust the position of either mirror, move the lever to R or L to select the right side mirror or the left side mirror, then press a corresponding point on the mirror adjustment control to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with dashed circular annotation (no text or symbols)

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 2

text_image A238

Folding the outside rearview mirror

Manual Type

To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the housing of mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.

Electric Type (If equipped)

To fold the outside rearview mirror, depress the button.

To unfold it, depress the button again.

\* NOTICE

In case of the electric type of outside rearview mirror, don't fold it by hand. It could cause the failure of the motor.

Outside rearview mirror heater (if equipped)

The outside rearview mirror heater is actuated in connection with the rear window defroster. To heat the outside rearview mirror glass, push the button for the rear window defroster.

The outside rearview mirror glass will be heated for defrosting or defogging and will give you improved rear vision in inclement weather conditions. Push the button again to turn the heater off. The outside rearview mirror heater automatically turns itself off after 20 minutes.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Outside rearview mirror heater (if equipped) - 1

text_image Day/Night lover Day Night 1RS104017A

Day/Night Rearview Mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror to center on the view through the rear window. Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day/night lever is in the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

CAUTION

Do not allow objects in the rear seat or cargo area to interfere with your vision out the rear window.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

INTERIOR LIGHTS
KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

text_image Type A 2BLA430J

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 2

text_image Type B 2BLA430E

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 3

text_image OT COCON 2BLA324

Dome light

The dome light has three buttons:

OFF - The light stays OFF even when a door is open.

DOOR - The light turns ON or OFF when a door is opened or closed. The light goes out gradually during 5–6 seconds after the door is closed.

ON - The light turns ON and stays ON even when the doors are all closed.

Map Light

The lights are turned ON or OFF by pressing the corresponding switch.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Map Light - 1

text_image OFF ON OFF 2BLA325 R

Rear Cargo Area Light

The switch has three positions:

OFF - The light stays OFF even when a door is open.

- The light turns ON or OFF when a door is opened or closed. The light goes out gradually during 5–6 seconds after the door is closed.

ON - The light turns ON and stays A750A ON even when the doors are all closed.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Map Light - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car's side profile showing the nose and seat area (no text or symbols)

Door Courtesy Lamp

The door courtesy lamp comes ON when the door is opened to assist when you get in or out and also to warn passing vehicle.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

CUP HODER

KIA Sorento (2005) - CUP HODER - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car headrest and side arm mechanism (no text or symbols)

Front Cup Holder

A cup holder is located on the center console for holding cups.

A WARNING

  • Do not place uncovered cups of hot liquid in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion. If the hot liquid spills, you could be burned. Such a burn to the driver could cause a loss of control of the vehicle.
    • To reduce the risk of personal injury in the event of a sudden stop or collision, do not place bottles, glasses, cans, etc in the cup holders.

KIA Sorento (2005) - A WARNING - 1

natural_image Diagram showing two car interior compartments with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Rear Cup Holder

To use the rear cup holder, press the front face, release it and extend from the console box.

To return the cup holder to its closed position, push it completely into the console box. The cup holder latching mechanism will "click" when it is locked into position.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

KIA Sorento (2005) - STORAGE COMPARTMENT - 1

text_image Diagram showing car interior control panel with labeled buttons and a black arrow pointing to the button

Center Tray

To use the storage compartment, press the front face, and then release it to allow the storage compartment to slowly extend from the instrument panel.

WARNING

Do not put gas lighters and other explosive materials in the vehicle. These may cause explosion if the vehicle is exposed for extended periods outside in hot weather.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard and air vent (no text or symbols)

Multi Box

The multi box may be opened by pulling it out by its handle grip. It can be used for storing small items.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

natural_image Four-panel line drawing showing a hand holding a device, with separate views of the same object (no text or symbols)

Center Console Storage

To use the console storage compartment, pull the cover up.

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a belt and seatbelt, no text or symbols present

Under Tray (If equipped)

The under tray is located under the front passenger's seat and can be opened by pulling it out.

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 3

text_image A313BRBLA339

Glove Box

The glove box door can be locked or unlocked with a key.

To open the glove box door, pull the latch out and let the glove box open.

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 4

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed while driving.

\*NOTICE

Do not leave valuables in the glove box to avoid theft.

SUNGLASS HOLDER
KIA Sorento (2005) - \*NOTICE - 1

text_image 2BLA430H

At the overhead console a compartment is provided for the storage of a sunglasses. To open the sunglass holder, press the cover and the holder will slowly open. Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out.

\* NOTICE

Please close the sunglass holder while driving.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof switches located on the overhead console.

KIA Sorento (2005) - SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED) - 1

text_image FUSH 2BLA430C

Sliding the Sunroof

The sunroof can be opened or closed when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

To slide the sunroof, momentarily press "OPEN" (on the SLIDE switch. The sunroof will slide all the way open. To stop the sunroof sliding at any point, press any sunroof switches.

To close the sunroof, press "CLOSE" ( ) on the SLIDE switch and hold it until it is closed completely.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Sliding the Sunroof - 1

text_image USB 2BLA430G

Tilting the Sunroof

To tilt the sunroof, momentarily press "UP" (on the TILT switch. The sunroof will tilt all the way up. To stop the sunroof tilting at any point, press any sunroof switches.

To close it, press "DOWN" (on the TILT switch and hold it until it is closed completely.

\* NOTICE

The sunroof cannot slide when it is in the tilt position nor can it be tilted while in an open or slide position.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \* NOTICE - 1

natural_image 3D rendering of a rectangular electronic device with two internal slots and a label '2BLA361' at the bottom (no other text or symbols)

Sunshade

The sunshade will be opened with the glass panel automatically when the glass panel is slid. You will have to close it manually if you want it closed.

\* NOTICE

  • Do not depress the sunroof switch longer than necessary. It could cause the failure of the sunroof motor.
    • Periodically remove any dirt that may accumulate on the guide rail.
  • If you try to open the sunroof when the temperature is below freezing or when the sunroof is covered with snow or ice, the glass or the motor could be damaged.

In case of an Emergency

If the sunroof does not open electrically:

  1. Remove the lens.
  2. Remove the two (2) screws, and then remove the overhead console.
  3. Insert the emergency handle (provided with the vehicle) and turn the handle clockwise to open or counterclockwise to close.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

text_image 2BLA738B 2BLA329

Resetting the Sunroof

When your battery happens to be disconnected or discharged, or you use the emergency handle to operate the sunroof, you have to reset your sunroof system as follows:

  1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position
  2. Tilt the sunroof up fully as follows:

Case A: When the sunroof has closed completely or been tilted: Press the TILT UP button for 1 second then release it.

Case B: When the sunroof has slid open:

Press and hold the close button for more than 5 seconds until the sunroof has closed completely, then press the TILT UP button for 1 second and release it.

  1. Press and hold the TILT UP button once again until the sunroof moves slightly and returns to the original TILT UP position.
  2. Release the TILT Up button when the procedure is finished. The sun-roof system is reset.

ROOF RACK (IF EQUIPPED)

KIA Sorento (2005) - ROOF RACK (IF EQUIPPED) - 1

text_image cross bars (if equipped) 2BLA618B

If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can load things on top of your vehicle. The two cross bars on the roof rack can be repositioned forward or rearward for conveniently loading cargo or luggage. With an assistant on the opposite side of the vehicle, press and hold the slider lock buttons on each side, then move the cross bar to the desired position. Release the buttons and lock the cross bar by moving the cross bar slightly forward or rearward.

CAUTION

  • The cross bars should be positioned before carrying a load on the roof rack.
    • In case the sunroof is equipped, do not position roof rack loads that could interfere with opening of the sunroof.
  • The following specification is maximum weight when loading cargo or luggage.
RACK ROOFFor Europe : 75kg (165 lbs.) Except Europe : 45 kg (100 lbs.) EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
  • Loading cargo or luggage above 75kg (165 lbs.)-Europe, 45 kg (100 lbs.) - Except Europe on the roof rack may damage your vehicle.
    When you carry large objects, never let them hang over the rear or the sides of your vehicle.
    • To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving, check frequently to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still securely fastened.
    • Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.
  • Loading cargo or luggage over specification on the roof rack may damage stability of your vehicle.

INTERIOR FEATURES

KIA Sorento (2005) - INTERIOR FEATURES - 1

text_image RBLA335E

Cigarette Lighter

To use the cigarette lighter, press the front face then release it to allow the cigarette lighter and ashtray to slowly extend from center panel.

To operate the cigarette lighter, press it in and release it. When it is heated, it automatically pops out ready for use.

If the engine is not running, the ignition switch must be in the ACC position for the lighter to operate.

\*NOTICE

  • Do not hold the lighter in after it is already heated because it will overheat.
  • Only a genuine Kia lighter should be used in the cigarette lighter socket. The use of plug-in accessories (shavers, hand-held vacuums, and coffee pots, for example) may damage the socket or cause electrical failure.
  • If the lighter does not pop out within 30 seconds, remove it to prevent overheating.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \*NOTICE - 1

text_image RBLA335B

Ashtrays

Front ashtray

To use the ashtray, press the front face and release it to allow the cigarette lighter and ashtray to slowly extend from center panel.

To remove the ashtray, grasp the ash-tray bucket and carefully pull it out.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Front ashtray - 1

WARNING - Ashtray Use

  • Do not use the vehicle's ashtrays as waste receptacles.
  • Putting lit cigarettes or matches in an ashtray with other combustible materials may cause a fire.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - Ashtray Use - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a hand holding a refrigerator with a belt switch, no text or symbols present

Rear Ashtray

You can open the rear ashtray by pulling it out by its top edge. To remove the ashtray to empty or clean, push the tab inside, lift it up slightly and pull it all the way out.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Rear Ashtray - 1

natural_image Line drawing showing a hand holding a device and a close-up of a device (no text or symbols present)

Sunvisors

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward. To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket and swing it to the side.

Vanity mirror (if equipped)
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the visor and pull up the mirror cover then the lamp, if equipped, comes ON. If you don't use the mirror, you must close the cover to prevent the battery from being discharged.

Power Socket

The power outlets are designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 10 amps with the engine running.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Power Socket - 1

text_image RBLA002B RBLA326F 2BLC303

CAUTION

  • Use the power outlet when the engine is running, and remove a plug from the power outlet after using the electric appliance. Using when the engine stops or remaining the electric appliance with plugged in for many hours may cause the battery to be discharged.
  • Only use the electric appliances which are less than 12V and 10A in electric capacity.
  • Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operation level when you have to use the power socket while using air-conditioner or heater.
  • Close the cover when not in use.
  • Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicle's power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

text_image 8:88 H M 30 A TBP C1 A °C E AC N K 400 2BLC450G

Digital Clock

When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the clock buttons operate as follows:

• HOUR:

Pressing the "H" button with your finger, a pencil or similar object will advance the time displayed by one hour.

• MINUTE:

Pressing the "M" button with your finger, a pencil or similar object will advance the time displayed by one minute.

- RESET:

To clear away minutes, press the ":00" button with your finger, a pencil or similar object. Then the clock will be set precisely on the hour.

For example, if the “:00” button is pressed while the time is between 9:01 and 9:29, the display will be reset to 9:00.

9:01 \~ 9:29 => 9:00

9:30 \~ 9:59 => 10:00

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

ANTENNA
KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical component with rotational arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

  • Be sure to remove the antenna before washing the car in an automatic car wash or it may be damaged.
  • When reinstalling your antenna, it is important that it is fully tightened to ensure proper reception.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

Fixed Rod Antenna (If equipped)

Your car uses a fixed rod antenna to receive both AM and FM broadcast signals.

This antenna is removable. To remove the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To install the antenna, turn it clockwise.

Power Antenna (If Equipped)

The antenna will automatically be extended when the radio power switch is turned "ON" while the ignition key is either in the "ON" or "ACC" position. The antenna will automatically be retracted and stored when either the radio power switch is turned "OFF" or the ignition key is set to the "LOCK" position.

CAUTION

Before turning on the radio while stopped, make sure that no one is near the antenna.

\*NOTICE

  • Before entering an automatic car wash, be sure that the antenna is retracted and stored.
  • If the antenna is dirty, be sure to clean it before turning off the radio or the vehicle engine in order to prevent jamming the antenna.

CD AUTO CHANGER (IF EQUIPPED)

A CD Auto Changer is located under the driver's seat. This system can store up to 6 CDs.

You may select music without changing disks. First, open the CD Auto Changer door and insert 6 CDs by taking out the magazine. Then, push the magazine in.

\* NOTICE

The magazine can be taken out when the ignition key is in the "ON" position.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

BARRIER NET (IF EQUIPPED)

KIA Sorento (2005) - BARRIER NET (IF EQUIPPED) - 1

natural_image Top-down line drawing of a car backrest with internal grid pattern (no text or symbols)

It is designed to help protect the heads of the occupants by obstructing objects flying forward in frontal collisions.

There are four hook holders on both side of the headliner over the headrests for upper side fixation and four hook holders on the floor behind the front and rear seats for lower side fix-

2BLB306 2BLB307A

Your vehicle is equipped with a barrier net.

When you load some cargoes on the rear seat or rear cargo area, you must install the barrier net behind front seatback or rear seatback.

KIA Sorento (2005) - BARRIER NET (IF EQUIPPED) - 2

natural_image Simple line drawing of a device with an arrow pointing to a curved surface (no text or symbols)

To Install the Barrier Net

  1. Open the upper side hook holder covers located on both side of the headliner by pushing rearward.

KIA Sorento (2005) - To Install the Barrier Net - 1

text_image 2BLB309A 2
  1. Insert the net upper shaft into the large hole and then secure by sliding into the small hole.

KIA Sorento (2005) - To Install the Barrier Net - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a vehicle interior with a roof-mounted grille and curved road (no text or symbols)
  1. Close the holder covers by pushing forward.

KIA Sorento (2005) - To Install the Barrier Net - 3

natural_image Diagram showing three steps of a cleaning or installation procedure: surface inspection, hand tooling, and packaging (no text or symbols present)
  1. Hang the net strap hooks in the hook holders on the floor behind the front or rear seat.

KIA Sorento (2005) - To Install the Barrier Net - 4

natural_image Diagram of a vehicle's air vent with a mesh grille and handle, no text or symbols present
  1. Fasten the straps by pulling down to take up the slack.

A WARNING

  • Make sure that there is no slack in the barrier net by pulling the strap securely when installing the net. The strap should be pulled after confirming that the hook is inserted into the upper hook holder securely.
  • Make sure that the upper hook holder covers are closed when the barrier net is installed.
    • Make sure that the seatbacks are locked securely.

A WARNING

  • Do not put passengers in the rear seat or cargo area behind the barrier net.
  • Do not put passenger in the rear center seat when the barrier net is installed behind the rear seats. The barrier net may interfere with use of the rear center safety belt.
  • Do not load cargo in the area higher than the barrier net's upper end.
  • Do not load heavy cargo in the area higher than the seatback to avoid accident even if the barrier net is installed.
  • Do not load cargo which has sharp edge that can pass through the barrier net.
  • Do not apply excessive force to the barrier net by hanging on to the net or by suspending heavy cargo and so on.

KIA Sorento (2005) - A WARNING - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car interior showing a ventilation grille and exhaust pipe (no text or symbols)

To Remove the Barrier Net

  1. Loosen the straps by pulling up the strap adjusters and remove the strap hooks from the hook holders.
  2. Open the upper holder covers by pushing rearward and remove the net upper shaft by pulling it through the large holes.
  3. Remove the barrier net and close the holder covers by pushing forward.

LUGGAGE NET (IF EQUIPPED)
KIA Sorento (2005) - A WARNING - 2

natural_image Top-down line drawing of a car backrest with a mesh-patterned backrest area (no text or symbols)

To keep items from shifting in the trunk, you can use the four rings located in the trunk to attach the cargo net.

CAUTION

Do not put fragile, bulky or excessive quantity of items into luggage net. They could be damaged.

WARNING

Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch. ALWAYS keep face and body out of recoil path. DO NOT use when strap has visible signs of wear or damage.

KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE

TONNEAU COVER (IF EQUIPPED)
KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

natural_image Top-down line drawing of a car backrest with a directional arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Use the tonneau cover to hide items stored in the cargo area.

KIA Sorento (2005) - KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE - 2

natural_image Side-view diagram of a car backrest and side profile, showing front and rear views (no text or symbols)

To use the tonneau cover, pull the handle backward and insert the edges into the slots of the slide rails.

CAUTION

  • Do not place objects on the tonneau cover. Such objects may be thrown about inside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicle occupants during an accident or when braking.
  • Since the tonneau cover may be damaged or malformed, do not put the luggage on it when it is used.
  • For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
  • Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is designed for luggage only.
  • Try to maintain the balance of the vehicle and locate the weight as far forward as possible.

LUGGAGE CENTER BOX (IF EQUIPPED)
KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

natural_image Top-down line drawing of a car rear view showing the dashboard and seat area (no text or symbols)

The luggage center box is located under the floor in cargo area. You can place a first aid kit, a reflector triangle, tools, etc. in the box for easy access.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 2

natural_image Diagram of a car interior with a mounted sensor and attached electrical meter (no text or symbols)
  1. Grasp the handle on the top of the cover and lift it.

  2. Detach the hook from the cover and hang the hook on the top edge of the roof.

To close the cover, hang the hook on the bottom of the cover.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

Ignition Switch 4-2

Starting the Gasoline Engine 4-4

Starting the Diesel Engine 4-7

Manual Transmission 4-9

Automatic Transmission 4-11

Four Wheel Drive(4WD) 4-19

Limited Slip Differential 4-29

Brake System 4-29

Steering Wheel 4-35

Cruise Control System 4-38

Instrument Cluster (Gasoline Engine) 4-43

Instrument Cluster (Diesel Engine) 4-45

Gauges 4-46

Warnings and Indicators 4-48

Multi-Meter 4-55

Lighting 4-61

Wipers and Washers 4-66

Defroster 4-70

Hazard Warning Flasher 4-71

Manual Climate Control System 4-72

Automatic Climate Control System 4-80

Windshield Defrosting and Defogging (Manual type) ..... 4-88

Windshield Defrosting and Defogging (Automatic type) .. 4-90

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

IGNITION SWITCH

KIA Sorento (2005) - IGNITION SWITCH - 1

text_image RBLA401A

Illuminated Ignition Switch

Whenever a door is opened, the ignition switch will be illuminated for your convenience, provided the ignition switch is not in the ON position. The light will go off approximately 10 seconds after closing the door or when the ignition switch is turned on.

Ignition Switch and Anti-Theft Steering Column Lock

Ignition switch position

LOCK

The steering wheel locks to protect against theft. The ignition key can be removed only in the LOCK position. When turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position, push the key inward at the ACC position and turn the key toward the LOCK position.

ACC (Accessory)

The steering wheel is unlocked and electrical accessories are operative.

ON

The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started. This is the normal running position after the engine is started.

Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the engine is not running to prevent battery discharge.

START

Turn the ignition key to the START position to start the engine. The engine will crank until you release the key; then it returns to the ON position. The brake warning lamp can be checked in this position.

If difficulty is experienced in turning the ignition key to the START position, turn the steering wheel right and left to release the tension and then turn the key.

WARNING - Ignition Key

- Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is moving. This would result in loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an immediate accident.

- The anti-theft steering column lock is not a substitute for the parking brake. Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is engaged in 1st gear for manual transmission, or P (Park) for automatic transmission; set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not taken.

- Never reach for the ignition switch, or any other controls through the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in this area could cause a loss of vehicle control, an accident and serious bodily injury or death.

- Do not put any movable things around the driver's seat as they can disturb your driving and may cause accidents.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

STARTING THE GASOLINE ENGINE

  1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
  2. Manual Transmission - Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift the transmission into Neutral. Keep the clutch pedal depressed while cranking the engine.

Automatic Transmission - Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park). Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.

  1. Turn the ignition switch to START and hold it there until the engine starts (a maximum of 10 seconds), then release the key.
  2. In extremely cold weather (below -18^ / 0^ ) or after the vehicle has not been operated for several days, let the engine warm up without depressing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, it should be started without depressing the accelerator.

CAUTION

If the engine stalls while you are in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P (Park) position (Automatic Transmission). If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition switch to the START position in an attempt to restart the engine.

If the Engine Fails to Start When the Engine is Cold:

The engine is "cold" when the engine coolant temperature drops below 0^ / 32^ . A no-start condition may be caused by an engine that has become flooded (has excessive fuel in the cylinders). If this is the case, use the following starting procedure.

  1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
  2. Manual Transmission - Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift the transmission into Neutral.

Automatic Transmission - Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park) or N (Neutral). Depress the brake pedal fully.

  1. While fully depressing the accelerator, turn the ignition switch to the START position and hold it (a maximum of 10 seconds) to discharge the excess fuel.
    If the engine starts, the engine speed will increase suddenly; release the key and the accelerator immediately.
  2. If the engine has not yet started, release the accelerator after cranking the engine. Without depressing the accelerator, crank the engine until it starts (a maximum of 10 seconds).

If the Engine Fails to Start When the Engine is Warm:

A no-start condition, characterized by failure to restart a warmed engine despite repeated attempts may be eliminated by using the following procedure.

  1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
  2. Manual Transmission - Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift the transmission into Neutral.

Automatic Transmission - Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park) or N (Neutral). Depress the brake pedal fully.

  1. While depressing the accelerator about halfway, turn the ignition switch to the START position and hold it (a maximum of 10 seconds).

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

  1. After the engine starts, let it idle for about 10 seconds before driving.

Excessive engine noise may occur if the engine has not been operated for an extended period. The noise should stop after the engine has reached normal operating temperature. If the noise does not stop, have the vehicle inspected by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

\*NOTICE

Do not engage the starter for more than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-engaging the starter. Improper use of the starter may damage it.

STARTING THE DIESEL ENGINE

To start the diesel engine when the engine is cold, it has to be pre-heat-ed before starting the engine and then have to be warmed up before starting the driving.

  1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
  2. Manual Transmission - Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift the transmission into the Neutral. Keep the clutch pedal depressed while cranking the engine.

Automatic Transmission - Place the transmission shift lever in P(park). Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N(neutral) position.

  1. Turn the ignition switch ON position to pre-heat the engine. Then the glow indicator light will illuminate.

KIA Sorento (2005) - STARTING THE DIESEL ENGINE - 1

text_image Glow Indicator Light W-60
  1. If the glow indicator light goes out, turn the ignition switch to START and hold it there until the engine starts (a maximum of 10 seconds), then release the key.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

\*NOTICE

If the engine were not started within 2 seconds after the preheating is completed, turn the ignition key once more to the LOCK position during 10 seconds, and then to the ON position, in order to preheat again.

Starting and Stopping the Engine for Turbo Charger Intercooler

  1. Do not race or accelerate the engine immediately after starting. If the engine is cold, allow the engine to idle for several seconds before it is driven to ensure sufficient lubrication of the turbo charger unit.

  2. After high speed or extended driving, requiring a heavy engine load, the engine should be allowed to idle, as shown in the chart below, before turning it off.

This idle time will allow the turbo charger to cool prior to shutting the engine off.

Driving Condition Required Idle Time
Normal driving Not necessary
High speed drivingUp to 80 km/h About 20 seconds
Up to 100 km/h About 1 minute
Steep mountain slopes or continued driving in excess About 2 minutes of 100 km/h

WARNING

Do not turn the engine off immediately after it has been subjected to a heavy load. Doing so may cause severe damage to the engine or turbo charger unit.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

KIA Sorento (2005) - MANUAL TRANSMISSION - 1

text_image 1 3 5 N 2 4 R 2BLA404

Manual Transmission Operation

The manual transmission has five forward gears.

Press the clutch pedal down fully while shifting, then release it slowly. A special safety feature prevents inadvertent shifting from 5 (Fifth) to R (Reverse). The gearshift lever must be returned to the Neutral position before shifting into R (Reverse).

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).

\*NOTICE

To avoid premature clutch wear and damage, do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. Also, don't use the clutch pedal to hold the vehicle stopped on an upgrade. (while waiting for a traffic light, etc.)

A WARNING

Before leaving the driver's seat, always set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Then make sure the transmission is shifted into 1st gear. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed in the order identified.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

The chart shows when to shift for smooth driving and best fuel economy.

This data has been obtained through tests. You are encouraged to follow this shift schedule.

You may have to up shift at higher speeds than those above if you need more power while you are driving on a hill or passing another vehicle.

However, never operate the engine with the tachometer (RPM) in the red area.

Gear PositionSpeeds - km/h (Mph)
1 0-21 (0-13)
2 21-40 (13-25)
3 40-60 (25-37)
4 60-72 (37-45)
5 over 72 (over45)

Downshifting

When you must slow down in a heavy traffic or while driving up steep hills, downshift before the engine starts to labor. Downshifting reduces the chance of stalling and gives better acceleration when you again need to increase your speed. When the vehicle is traveling down steep hills, downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake's life.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (30-40LEi, IF EQUIPPED)

KIA Sorento (2005) - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (30-40LEi, IF EQUIPPED) - 1

text_image Shift lever Shift show

Lock release button

Prevents shift lever movement without first depressing the button.

O/D OFF button

Shift pattern indicator shows shift lever position and gear range of the transmission.

KIA Sorento (2005) - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (30-40LEi, IF EQUIPPED) - 2

Normal transmission gear ranges are provided on the right side of the indicator.

The lock release button must be depressed while moving the shift lever.

The shift lever can be moved without depressing the lock release button.

KIA Sorento (2005) - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (30-40LEi, IF EQUIPPED) - 3

RBLA402B

KIA Sorento (2005) - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (30-40LEi, IF EQUIPPED) - 4

text_image RBLA402C

Automatic Transmission Operation

All normal forward driving is done with the shift lever in the D (Drive) position. To move the shift lever from the P (Park) position, the brake pedal must be depressed, and the lock release button must be depressed.

For smooth operation, depress the brake pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a forward or Reverse gear.

CAUTION

  • Do not accelerate the engine in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the brakes on.
  • When stopped on an upgrade, do not hold the vehicle stationary with engine power. Use the service brake or the parking brake.
  • Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P (Park) into L (Low), 2 (Second Gear), D (Drive), or R (Reverse) when the engine is above idle speed.

WARNING - Automatic

Transmission

Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (PARK) position; then set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed in the order identified.

\* NOTICE - Gasoline Engine

If the Emission Control system Malfunction Indicator Light (☑) flashes, it indicates an electrical problem with the transmission. Should this occur, have the vehicle checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer as soon as possible, except as explained in "Rocking the Vehicle".

KIA Sorento (2005) - \* NOTICE - Gasoline Engine - 1

natural_image Mechanical lever diagram showing a shaft with a handle and arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

O/D (Over Drive) System

Pressing the O/D system button cancels and engages the overdrive system. When the O/D system is cancelled, the O/D OFF indicator illuminates and the transmission gear range is limited to 1st through 3rd. The transmission will not shift to 4th gear until the O/D system button is pressed again to release the switch. When driving down a sloping road with the transmission in O/D (4th), you can decrease the vehicle speed without using the brakes by pressing the O/D OFF button.

When the ignition is switched OFF, O/D OFF mode is automatically cancelled.

O/D OFF Indicator

This indicator light illuminates in the instrument panel when the O/D mode is cancelled.

\* NOTICE - Diesel Engine

If the O/D OFF indicator flashes, it indicates an electrical problem with the transmission. Should this occur, have the vehicle checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer as soon as possible, except as explained in “Rocking the Vehicle”.

Transmission ranges

P (Park)

This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from rotating. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into this position.

R (Reverse)

Use this position for backing-up the vehicle.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transmission are not locked. The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or service brakes are applied.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward driving position. The transmission will automatically shift through a 4th gear sequence, providing the best economy and power.

2 (Second)

Use 2 (second gear) for more power climbing hills and for increased braking when going down hills. When the shift lever is placed in 2 (second gear), the transmission will automatically shift from 1st to 2nd gear.

L (Low)

Move the shift lever to this position in hard pulling situations and for climbing steep grades.

CAUTION

The transmission may be damaged if you shift into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion.

CAUTION

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R (Reverse); you may damage transmission if you shift into R while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

  • Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion will cause the drive wheels to lock and you will lose control of the vehicle.
    • Always make sure the shift lever is latched in the P (Park) position so that it cannot be moved unless the lock release button is depressed.
  • Never leave a child unattached in a vehicle.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (A5SR1, IF EQUIPPED)
KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - 1

text_image Lock release button prevents shift lever movement without first depressing the button. + (UP) Sports mode - (DOWN) Automatic mode The lock release button must be depressed while moving the shift lever. The shift lever can be moved without depressing the lock release button. R4BLA402B

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

text_image Sports mode (UP) (DOWN) Automatic mode R4BLA402B

Automatic Transmission Operation

All normal forward driving is done with the shift lever in the D (Drive) position. To move the shift lever from the P (Park) position, the brake pedal must be depressed, and the lock release button must be depressed.

For smooth operation, depress the brake pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a forward or Reverse gear.

CAUTION

  • Do not accelerate the engine in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the brakes on.
  • When stopped on an upgrade, do not hold the vehicle stationary with engine power. Use the service brake or the parking brake.
  • Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R (Reverse) when the engine is above idle speed.

WARNING - Automatic

Transmission

Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (PARK) position; then set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed in the order identified.

Transmission ranges

P (Park)

This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from rotating. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into this position.

R (Reverse)

Use this position for backing-up the vehicle.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transmission are not locked. The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or service brakes are applied.

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward driving position. The transmission will automatically shift through a 4th gear sequence, providing the best economy and power.

For extra power when passing another vehicle or climbing grades, depress the accelerator fully, at which time the transmission will automatically downshift to the next lower gear.

KIA Sorento (2005) - D (Drive) - 1

text_image Sports mode + (UP) - (DOWN) Automatic mode R4BLA402C

Sports mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the "D" position into the manual gate. To return to "D" range operation, push the shift lever back into the main gate.

In sports mode, moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a manual transmission, the sports mode allows gearshifts with the accelerator pedal depressed.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear.

Down (-): Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear.

\* NOTICE

- Upshifts do not take place automatically in sports mode. The driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road conditions, taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone.

- In sports mode, only the five forward gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the shift lever to the "R" or "P" position as required.

- In sports mode, downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- In sports mode, when the engine rpm approaches the red zone shift points are varied to upshift automatically.

- To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever is operated.

- When driving on a slippery road, push the shift lever forward into the +(up) position. This causes the transmission to shift into the 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving on a slippery road. Push the shift lever to the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st gear.

- While the vehicle is driving in 5th gear with the shift lever in the "D" position, selecting the shift lever to sports mode position causes the transmission to downshift to 4th gear automatically to secure driving performance. At the time of shifting you can have a shift feeling.

Moving up a steep grade from a standing start

To move up a steep grade from a standing start, depress the brake pedal, shift the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the appropriate gear depending on load weight and steepness of the grade, and release the parking brake. Depress the accelerator gradually while releasing the service brakes.

Ignition key inter lock system (if equipped)

The ignition key cannot be removed unless the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. If the ignition switch is in any other position, the key cannot be removed.

Shift lock system (if equipped)

For your safety, the Automatic Transaxle has a shift lock system which prevents shifting the transaxle out of P (Park) unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transaxle out of P (Park):

  1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
  2. Start the engine or turn the ignition to the ON position.
  3. Depress the lock release button and move the shift lever.

When the ignition switch is in the ACC or LOCK position, the transaxle cannot be shifted from P (Park).

If the brake pedal is repeatedly depressed and released with the shift lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering noise near the shift lever may be heard. This is a normal condition.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (IF EQUIPPED)

For Safe Four-Wheel Drive Operation

  • Your vehicle allows you to drive in on-road and off-road conditions.
    • However, do not try to drive in deep standing water, mud, or over steep hills.
  • When you are driving up or down hills drive as close to straight up and down the hill as possible. Use extreme caution in going up or down steep hills, since you may flip your vehicle over depending on the grade, terrain and water/mud conditions.

WARNING

Driving across the contour of steep hills can be extremely dangerous. This danger can come from slight changes in the wheel angle which can destabilize the vehicle or, even if the vehicle is maintaining stability under power, it can lose that stability if the vehicle stops its forward motion. Your vehicle may roll over without warning and without time for you to correct a mistake that could cause serious injury or death.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

  • You must learn how to corner in a 4WD vehicle as soon as possible. Do not rely on your experience in conventional 2WD vehicles in choosing safe cornering speed. You must drive more slowly.
  • Drive off-road carefully because your vehicle may be damaged by rocks or roots of trees. Become familiar with the off-road conditions you are going to drive before you start.

Z CAUTION

Do not grab inside of the steering wheel when you are driving off-road. Your arm may be hurt by a sudden steering maneuver or from steering wheel rebound due to impact with objects on the ground. This may cause you to lose steering wheel control.

WARNING

Reduce speed when you turn corners. The center of gravity of 4WD vehicles is higher than that of conventional 2WD vehicles, making them more likely to roll over when you turn corners too fast.

• Always hold the steering wheel firmly when you are driving off-road.
- Make sure all passengers are wearing seat belts.
- Do not drive in water if the level is higher than the bottom of the vehicle.
- Check your brake condition once you are out of mud or water. Press the brake pedal several times as you move slowly until you feel normal braking forces return.
- Shorten your scheduled maintenance interval if you drive in off-road conditions such as sand, mud or water (see "Scheduled Maintenance" in the Index). Always wash you car thoroughly.

CAUTION

If you are driving in heavy wind, the vehicle's higher center of gravity decreases your steering control capacity and requires you to drive more slowly.

WARNING

If you are driving too fast in water, the water spray can get into the engine compartment and wet the ignition system, causing your vehicle a sudden stop. If this happens and your vehicle is in a tilted position, your vehicle may roll over.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - 1

text_image AUTO 4x4 LOW RBLA411B

Full-Time 4WD Operation (If equipped)

4WD transfer has a time delay for a few seconds until the actual shift is made after turning the transfer shift knob.

When 4WD transfer mode is shifted, it may cause mechanical noise or transfer shock. It is not a mechanical failure but a normal phenomenon.

When you have to stop the vehicle to the transfer shift knob, wait until corresponding indicator light turns on or off to depart. If the clutch is released, or vehicle moves before the transfer is completed, vehicle may be shocked.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

Knob position

This is used to set different positions.

AUTO

Full power delivered to front and rear axle for increased traction. Use this mode for normal on-road driving.

Type A: The 4WD LOW indicator light (Will be turned off after blinking for a few seconds to remind you that you are in the AUTO mode.

Type B: The 4WD LOW indicator light (150) will be turned off to remind you that you are in the AUTO mode.

LOW

Full power to both axles, including a lower gear ratio for low speed applications that require extra power such as wet pavement, snow-covered roads and/or off-road.

LOW Mode is not recommended on dry pavement.

Type A: The 4WD LOW indicator light ( 55 ) will be turned on after blinking for a few seconds to remind you that you are in the LOW mode.

Type B: The 4WD LOW indicator light ( 50 ) will be turned on to remind you that you are in the LOW mode.

Transfer shift knob operation

AUTO LOW

  1. Stop the vehicle.

  2. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual transmission) or put the shift lever into N (Neutral) position (Automatic transmission).

3. AUTO → LOW

: Turn the transfer shift knob to LOW mode.

LOW → AUTO

: Turn the transfer shift knob to AUTO mode.

  1. Before releasing the clutch pedal (Manual transmission) or shifting to other ranges from N range (Automatic transmission), wait for corresponding indicator light turns on or off in the cluster.

CAUTION

If the vehicle moves while the transfer shift is in process, the gearbox may be damaged.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

text_image • 2HI • 4HI (4x4) • 4LO RBLA412

Part-Time 4WD Operation (If equipped)

You can send your engine's driving power to all front and rear wheels for maximum power.

Four-wheel drive is useful when you drive in snow, mud, ice or sand where good traction is required, or when your wheels lose traction using two-wheel drive.

4WD transfer has a time delay for a few seconds until the actual shift is made after turning the transfer shift knob.

When 4WD transfer mode is shifted, it may cause mechanical noise or transfer shock. It is not a mechanical failure but a normal phenomenon.

When you have to stop the vehicle to the transfer shift, wait until corresponding indicator light turns on or off to depart. If the clutch is released, or vehicle moves before the transfer is completed, vehicle may be shocked.

\* NOTICE

  • Do not select four wheel drive on flat and normal roads.
  • Four-wheel driving on flat roads for a long period causes poor fuel economy and noise and it also causes tyres to wear faster.
  • Four-wheel driving on flat and normal roads can result in a severe binding and chattering condition when turning the steering wheel.
  • Four-wheel driving on flat roads for a long period can also cause the differential oil temperature to increase, resulting in damage to parts in the power train.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

Knob position

This is used to set different positions.

2HI (Rear-wheel drive)

This mode is used, when driving on normal roads and highway.

4HI (High-range 4-wheel drive)

This mode is used, when driving off-roads, wet snow covered roads with normal speed.

The 4WD indicator light ( ) will be turned on to remind you that you are in the 4HI mode.

4LO (Low-range 4-wheel drive)

Use 4LO for climbing or descending hills, off-roads driving and towing the vehicle, especially when increased power is required.

The 4WD LOW indicator light ( 100 ) will be turned on to remind you that you are in the 4LO mode.

Transfer shift knob operation

By turning the transfer knob (4HI, 4LO), both front & rear axles are engaged.

This improves the traction characteristic.

2HI → 4HI

Turn the transfer knob from the 2HI mode to 4HI mode at speed below 50mph(80km/h).

It is not necessary to depress the clutch pedal or put the shift lever into N (Neutral) position (Manual Transmission) or put the shift lever into N (Neutral) position (Automatic Transmission).

Perform this operation when driving straight. There will be a few seconds of time delay before come into 4HI mode when you shift the knob to 4HI from 2HI.

4III → 2III

Turn the transfer knob from the 4HI mode to the 2HI mode at speed below 50mph(80km / h) .It is not necessary to depress the clutch pedal for the manual transmission or put the shift lever into N(Neutral) for the Automatic transmission. Perform this operation when driving straight.

If the transfer mode does not shift into 2HI mode when you turn the transfer knob to 2HI, drive straight ahead with accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.

4III ↔ 4LO

  1. Stop the vehicle.

  2. Depress the clutch pedal for the manual transmission or put the shift lever into N(Neutral) for the automatic transmission.

  3. 4HI → 4LO

: Select the 4LO mode.

4LO→4HI

Select the 4HI mode.

  1. Before releasing the clutch pedal (Manual transmission) or shifting to other ranges from N range (Automatic transmission), wait for corresponding indicator light turns on or off in the cluster.

CAUTION

If the vehicle moves while the transfer shift is in process, the gearbox may be damaged.

Safe 4WD Operation

- The driving posture should be more upright and closer to the steering wheel than usual; adjust the seat to a good position for easy steering and pedal operation.

- Be sure to wear the seat belt.

- Drive carefully when driving offroads and avoid dangerous areas.

- Drive at lower speed in strong crosswinds.

Because of your vehicle's high center of gravity, its stability will be affected in crosswind. Slower speed ensure the better vehicle control.

- 4WD has a higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications. Specific design characteristics give them higher center of gravity than the ordinary cars.

An advantage of the higher ground clearance is the better view of the road allowing you to anticipate the problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speed as the conventional 2WD vehicles any more than low-slug sports car are designed to perform satisfactory under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

  • Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel when driving off-road. The steering wheel could jerk and injure your hands. Always firmly hold the outer steering wheel when you are driving off-road.
  • Check your brake condition once you are out of mud or water. Press the brake pedal several times as you move slowly until you feel normal braking forces return.
  • Four-wheel driving on flat and normal roads can result in severe binding condition when turning the steering wheel.

Driving on dry paved road and high-way:

Select 2HI(Part time 4WD) and AUTO (Full time 4WD) to drive on dry paved roads.

Especially on dry highway, never select the 4HI or 4LO(Part time 4WD) and LOW (Full time 4WD).

Driving on snowy or icy roads: Select the 4HI or 4LO (Part time 4WD) and AUTO or LOW (Full time 4WD) in accordance with the roads conditions, and then gradually depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth start.

Driving on sandy and muddy roads: Select the 4HI or 4LO(Part time 4WD) and AUTO or LOW (Full time 4WD) and then gradually depress the accelerator pedal for smooth start. Keep the pressure on the accelerator pedal as constant as possible, and drive at low speed.

Climbing sharp grades: Select 4LO(Part time 4WD) and LOW (Full time 4WD) to maximize the engine torque.

Descending sharp grades: Select 4LO(Part time 4WD) and LOW (Full time 4WD), use engine brake and descend slowly.

CAUTION

Do not transfer the shift knob while you are driving up or down hill.

  • Do not drive the vehicle through water.
  • The stopping distance of the full-time 4WD vehicle differs very little from that of 2WD vehicle.
  • Since the driving torque is always applied to the 4 wheels the performance of the 4WD vehicle is greatly affected by the condition of the tyres. Be sure to equip them with all four tyres with same size and type. When replacement of any of the tyres or disc wheels is necessary, replace all of them.

A WARNING

Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide for safe ride and handling capability.

Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel that is different from the one that is originally installed on your vehicle. It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to handling failure or rollover and serious injury.

When replacing the tires, be sure to equip all four tires with the tire and wheel of the same size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you nevertheless decide to equip your vehicle with any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Kia for off road driving, you should not use these tires for highway driving.

  • The full time four wheel drive vehicle cannot be towed by an ordinarily tow truck. Make sure that the vehicle is towed with its four wheels raised off the ground.
  • Use tire chains on all four wheels when driving in mud, if necessary. In some unavoidable circumstances, install them on only the rear wheels, not the front wheels.
  • If the front or rear wheels get stuck in the mud, do not spin them recklessly. The 4WD system could be damaged.

KIA Sorento (2005) - A WARNING - 1

text_image Roll tester (speedometer) Temporary free roller R5BLA401

- For speedometer test or inspection/maintenance (I/M) program of full-time 4WD vehicle, use a four wheel chassis dynamometer.

CAUTION

Never engage the parking brake while performing these tests.

- In rare cases when it's unavoidable that a 4WD vehicle is to be inspected for speedometer test on 2WD roll tester, strictly follow the procedures next.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

  1. Check the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.
  2. Place the rear wheels on the roll tester for speedometer test as shown in the illustration.
  3. Release the parking brake.
  4. Place the front wheels on the temporary free roller as shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Keep away from the front of the vehicle while inspecting. This is very dangerous as the vehicle can jump forward and cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION

While the full-time 4WD vehicle is being raised on a jack, never start the engine or cause the tyres to rotate.

There is the danger that rotating tyres touching the ground could cause the vehicle to go off the jack and to jump forward.

If one of the front or rear wheels begins to spin in mud, snow, etc. the vehicle can sometimes be driven out by depressing the accelerator pedal further; however avoid running the engine continuously at high rpm because doing so could damage the 4WD system.

A WARNING

  • Avoid high cornering speed.
  • Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
  • The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at high speeds.
    • In a collision crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die compared to a person wearing a seat belt.
  • Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over steers to re-enter the roadway.
  • In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.

LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (IF EQUIPPED)

A limited slip differential if equipped, is for the rear wheel differential only. The features of this limited slip differential are described below;

Just as with conventional differential, the wheel on one side is allowed to turn at a different speed from the wheel on the other side when the vehicle is cornering.

The difference between the limited slip differential and a conventional differential is that if the wheel on one side of the vehicle loses traction, a greater amount of torque is applied to the rear wheel on the other side to improve traction.

WARNING

To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off the ground, such as when changing a tyre.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Power Brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage.

In the event that the power-assisted brakes lose power because of a stalled engine or some other reason, you can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than you normally would. The stopping distance, however, will be longer.

When the engine is not running, the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted. Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.

In the Event of Brake Failure

If service brakes fail to operate while the vehicle is in motion, you can make an emergency stop with the parking brake. The stopping distance, however, will be much greater than normal.

WARNING - Parking Brake

Pulling on the parking brake while the vehicle is moving at normal speeds can cause a sudden loss of control of the vehicle. If you must use the parking brake to stop the vehicle, use great caution in applying the brake.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING - Brakes

- Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. This will create abnormal high brake temperatures, excessive brake lining and pad wear, and increased stopping distances.

- When descending a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear and avoid continuous application of the brakes. Continuous brake application will cause the brakes to overheat and could result in a temporary loss of braking performance.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- Wet brakes may result in the vehicle not slowing down at the usual rate and pulling to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will indicate whether they have been affected in this way. Always test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep water. To dry the brakes, apply them lightly while maintaining a safe forward speed until brake performance returns to normal.

Disk Brakes Wear Indicator

Your vehicle has disc brakes.

When your brake pads are worn and it's time for new pads, you will hear a high-pitched warning sound from your front brakes. You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal.

Please remember that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes.

\*NOTICE

To avoid costly brake repairs, do not continue to drive with worn brake pads.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \*NOTICE - 1

WARNING - Brake Wear

This brake wear warning sound means your vehicle needs service. If you ignore this audible warning, you will eventually lose braking performance, which could lead to a serious accident.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - Brake Wear - 1

CAUTION

Always replace brake pads as complete front or rear axle sets.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a hand using a gear shift lever on a vehicle (no text or symbols)

Parking Brake

To apply the parking brake, pull the parking brake handle fully and firmly upward while applying the service brake.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Parking Brake - 1

CAUTION

Driving with the parking brake on will cause excessive wear of the brake pads.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a hand using a gear shift lever on a car intake tray (no text or symbols)

To release the parking brake, pull the handle up slightly and push the release button. Then lower the handle to the released position while holding the button in.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 2

CAUTION

When stopped, do not use the gearshift lever in place of the parking brake. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift lever is securely positioned in 1st (First) gear or R (Reverse) for manual transmission equipped vehicles and in P (Park) for automatic transmission equipped vehicles.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

W-75

Check the brake warning light by turning the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). This light will be illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off.

If the brake warning light remains on after the parking brake is released, there may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate attention is necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe location or repair shop.

Parking on Curbed Streets

  • When parking your vehicle on an uphill grade, park as close to the curb as possible and turn the front wheels away from the curb so that the front wheels will contact the curb if the vehicle moves backward.
  • When parking your vehicle on a downhill grade, park as close to the curb as possible and turn the front wheels toward the curb so that the front wheels will contact the curb if the vehicle moves forward.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Parking on Curbed Streets - 1

W-78

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) (If equipped)

The anti-lock brake system is designed to prevent lock-up of the wheels during sudden braking or braking on slippery surfaces. Compared to a conventional brake system, the anti-lock brake system provides greater steering control during braking in such situations.

During normal driving conditions, the anti-lock brake system operates the same as a conventional brake system. When the anti-lock brake system is engaged due to imminent loss of traction, a pulsation of the brake pedal will result and you may hear or feel "chattering". This is a normal condition and indicates the system is functioning properly.

When driving a vehicle equipped with anti-lock brakes, adjust your driving according to the road and traffic conditions and keep the following in mind:

- Do not pump the brakes as you would when driving a vehicle not equipped with an anti-lock brake system (ABS). In order for the ABS to function normally, press the brake pedal firmly, without pumping the pedal.

  • Even with the anti-lock brake system, your vehicle still requires a sufficient stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you.
    • Always slow down when cornering. The anti-lock brake system cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speeds.
  • On loose or uneven road surfaces, operation of the anti-lock brake system may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system.
  • Avoid high speeds on wet roads. The anti-lock brake system cannot eliminate the risk of hydroplaning. If the anti-lock brake system should fail, the brake system will function as a conventional brake system. Have your vehicle checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer or other competent repair shop as soon as possible.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

\*NOTICE

  • If the ABS warning light is on and stays on, you may have a problem with the ABS system. In this case, however, your regular brakes will work normally.
  • The ABS warning light will stay on for 2-3 seconds after the ignition is ON. During that time, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal. If the light stays on you may have a problem with your ABS. Contact an Authorized Kia Dealer for service as soon as possible.

\*NOTICE

  • If the battery is discharged and the engine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This condition occurs because of a discharged battery and not because there is an anti-lock brake system malfunction.
  • Have the battery recharged before driving the vehicle.

WARNING - ABS Brakes

  • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot compensate for bad road conditions, for unsafe or reckless driving or for bad judgment.
  • The ABS is designed to improve maximum braking effectiveness on typical highways and roads in good condition. On road surfaces which are in poor condition, the ABS may actually reduce braking effectiveness.
    • Always operate your vehicle at reasonable speeds that are safe for weather and traffic conditions.

STEERING WHEEL

Power Steering

Power Steering uses energy from the engine to assist you in steering the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, the vehicle may still be steered, but it will require increased steering effort.

Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation, have the power steering checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer or another competent service center.

Electronic Power Steering (If equipped)

The wheel speed sensor controls steering power according to the vehicle's speed.

The steering wheel becomes heavier as the vehicle's speed increases and becomes lighter as the vehicle's speed decreases for the better control of the steering wheel.

\*NOTICE

- Never hold the steering wheel against a stop (extreme right or left turn) for more than 5 seconds with the engine running. Holding the steering wheel for more than 5 seconds in either position may cause damage to the power steering pump.

- If the power steering drive belt breaks or if the power steering pump malfunctions, the steering effort will greatly increase.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

\*NOTICE

If the vehicle is parked for extended periods outside in cold weather (below -10 °C/14 °F), the power steering may require increased effort when the engine is first started. This is caused by increased fluid viscosity due to the cold weather and does not indicate a malfunction.

When this happens, increase the engine RPM by depressing accelerator until the RPM reaches 1,500 rpm then release or let the engine idle for two or three minutes to warm up the fluid.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \*NOTICE - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

Tilt Steering (If equipped)

A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be positioned so that it is comfortable for you to drive, while permitting you to see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges.

To tilt the steering wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lock release lever. Adjust the steering wheel to a comfortable level, then release the lever to lock.

WARNING

  • Never adjust the angle of steering wheel while driving. You may lose your steering control and cause severe personal injury or accidents.
    • After adjusting, push the steering wheel both up and down to be certain it is locked in position.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - 1

natural_image Top-down line drawing of a car steering wheel with two circular headsets and a central display (no text or symbols)

Horn

To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on your steering wheel. Check the horn regularly to be sure it operates properly.

CAUTION

- To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.

- Do not strike the horn severely to operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do not press on the horn with a sharp-pointed object.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The cruise control system can maintain a constant cruising speed of more than 40 km/h (24 mph) for gasoline engine and 42km/h (26 mph) for diesel engine without manual control of the accelerator. A slight fluctuation in vehicle speed (3-5 km/h, 2-3 mph) while the cruise control system is active is normal. The cruise control system is useful when cruising on freeways, toll roads or other non-congested highways where frequent deceleration and acceleration are not required.

WARNING - Cruise Control

Using cruise control in the following conditions could cause you to lose control of the vehicle:

  1. Heavy or unsteady traffic

  2. Slippery or winding roads

  3. Situations that involve varying speeds

Do not use cruise control in these situations.

For diesel engine vehicle with auto cruise control system, you have to practice the following procedure to input the information to the ECU that auto cruise control system is installed prior to operate the auto cruise system for the 1st time:

  1. On the CRUISE main switch for more than 3 seconds while the engine is running. Then, the ECU learns that auto cruise control system is installed and store the information.

  2. Switch off the engine and wait for 7–8 seconds while the ECU is resetting.

  3. Start the engine again if you want to drive and operate the auto cruise system.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - Cruise Control - 1

text_image PME RBLA420

To set the cruise :

  1. Push the cruise control main switch. This turns the system on.

Gasoline Engine:

The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the cruise control system is activated.

Diesel Engine :

The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the CRUISE main switch is pressed.

2. Gasoline Engine:

Accelerate to desired cruising speed above 40 km/h (24 mph).

Diesel Engine :

Accelerate to desired cruising speed above 42 km/h (26 mph).

KIA Sorento (2005) - Gasoline Engine: - 1

text_image 2BLA421
  1. Push the COAST/SET control switch and release it.

  2. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the desired speed will automatically be maintained.

  3. To increase speed temporarily, depress the accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed the preset speed. When you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed you have set.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

\*NOTICE

The SET function cannot be activated until approximately 2 seconds after the CRUISE MAIN switch has been engaged.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may momentarily slow down after the SET function has been engaged.

Cruise control will cancel at about 15 km/h (9 mph) below the preset speed.

WARNING

If the CRUISE switch is left on, the cruise control can be turned on accidentally. Keep the CRUISE switch off when cruise control is not in use.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - 1

text_image 2BLA422A

To Increase the Cruising Speed:

Follow either of these procedures.

  • Depress the RES/ACCEL switch and hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
  • Release the switch at the new speed you want to maintain.

- Depress and immediately release the RES/ACCEL switch.

Gasoline Engine:

Vehicle speed will be increased only 1.6 km/h (1 mph). Using this technique provides for small vehicle speed increases.

Diesel Engine :

The vehicle speed will be increased by 4 km/h (2.5 mph) for maximum of 8 times.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Diesel Engine : - 1

natural_image Top-down view of a car steering wheel with two side-mounted buttons and a headrest (no text or symbols)

To Decrease the Cruising Speed:

Follow either of these procedures.

- Depress the COAST/SET switch and hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the switch at the speed you want to maintain.

- Depress and immediately release the COAST/SET switch.

Gasoline Engine:

Vehicle speed will be decreased 1.6 km/h (1 mph). Using this technique provides for small vehicle speed decreases.

Diesel Engine :

The vehicle speed will be decreased by 5 km/h (3 mph) for maximum of 8 times.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Diesel Engine : - 1

text_image 2BLA422A

To Resume Cruising Speed:

If something besides the CRUISE switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the most recent set speed will automatically resume when the RES/ACCEL function is activated by briefly depressing the switch.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

Gasoline Engine:

It will not resume, however, if the vehicle speed has dropped below 40 km/h (24 mph).

Diesel Engine:

It will not resume, however, if the vehicle speed has dropped below 42 km/h(26 mph).

To Cancel Cruise Control do One of the Followings:

  • Depress the brake pedal.
  • Depress the clutch pedal with a manual transmission or shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic transmission.
  • Depress the CANCEL switch located on your steering wheel.
  • Depress the COAST/SET and RES/ACCEL switches at the same time.

Each of these actions will cancel cruise control operation, but it will not turn the system off. If you wish to resume cruise control operation, depress the RES/ACCEL switch located on your steering wheel. You will return to your previously preset speed.

To Turn the Cruise Control OFF:

  • Depress the CRUISE control switch.
  • Turn the ignition off.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (2.4L GASOLINE & 2.5L DIESEL ENGINE : M/T)
KIA Sorento (2005) - To Turn the Cruise Control OFF: - 1

text_image Type A 1 2 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 MPH 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700
  1. Tachometer
  2. Turn signal indicators
  3. Speedometer
  4. Engine temperature gauge
  5. Warning and indicator lights
  6. Tripmeter / Odometer
  7. Trip meter reset button
  8. Fuel gauge

KIA Sorento (2005) - To Turn the Cruise Control OFF: - 2

text_image Type B 1 2 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 440 460 480 500 x 1000rpm

RBLA425A/RBLA425B

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (2.5L DIESEL ENGINE : A/T)
KIA Sorento (2005) - DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

text_image 30-40LEI A5SR1
  1. Tachometer
  2. Tum signal indicators
  3. Speedometer
  4. Engine temperature gauge
  5. Warning and indicator lights
  6. Tripmeter / Odometer
  7. Trip meter reset button
  8. Shift position indicator (A/T only)
  9. Fuel gauge

RBLA425F/2BLA425G

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (3.5L GASOLINE ENGINE : A/T)
KIA Sorento (2005) - DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE - 2

text_image 30-40LEI 1 2 3 2 4 5 6 7 98 5 A5SR1 1 2 3 2 4 5 6 7 98 5
  1. Tachometer
  2. Turn signal indicators
  3. Speedometer
  4. Engine temperature gauge
  5. Warning and indicator lights
  6. Tripmeter / Odometer
  7. Trip meter reset button
  8. Shift position indicator (A/T only)
  9. Fuel gauge

RBLA426A/RBLA425

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

GAUGES

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the forward speed of the vehicle.

Odometer/Tripmeter

You can choose the odometer, tripmeter A and tripmeter B by pressing the tripmeter mode button.

Odometer

The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

Tripmeter

TRIP A: Tripmeter A

TRIP B: Tripmeter B

The tripmeter indicates the distance of individual trips selected by the driver. Tripmeter A and B can be reset to zero by pressing the reset button for one second or more, and then releasing.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Tripmeter - 1

text_image Diesel Engine Red Zone 2BLA425C Gasoline Engine Red Zone 2BLA426A

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine. The tachometer pointer may move slightly when the ignition switch is in ACC or ON position with the engine OFF. This movement is normal and will not affect the accuracy of the tachometer once the engine is running.

\* NOTICE

Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE.

This may cause severe engine damage.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \* NOTICE - 1

text_image H E C 2BLA427

Engine Temperature Gauge

This gauge shows the temperature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch is ON.

Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to "Overheating" in the Index.

\* NOTICE

If the gauge pointer moves beyond the normal range area toward the "H" position, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \* NOTICE - 1

text_image E F 2BLA428

Fuel Gauge

The fuel gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.

Fuel tank capacity - 80 liters (20.8 US gal.).

The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel level has dropped to about 12 liters (3.1 US gal.).

KIA Sorento (2005) - Fuel Gauge - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior panel with control buttons and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Instrument Panel Illumination (Rheostat) (If equipped)

When the vehicle's parking lights or headlights are on, rotate the illumination control knob to adjust the instrument panel illumination intensity.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

Warning Lights / Audible Indicators

Checking operation

All warning lights are checked by turning the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). Any light that does not illuminate should be checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer or another competent service center.

After starting the engine, check to make sure that all warning lights are off. If any are still on, this indicates a situation that needs attention. When releasing the parking brake, the brake system warning light should go off. The fuel warning light will stay on if the fuel level is low.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light (If equipped)

This light illuminates when you start the engine. The light will go off if the ABS system is operating normally.

Also, this light illuminates if the key is turned to ON and goes off in 2-3 seconds if the system is operating normally.

O/D OFF Indicator (A/T:30-40LEi)

This indicator comes on when the O/D system is deactivated.

KIA Sorento (2005) - O/D OFF Indicator (A/T:30-40LEi) - 1

Engine Oil Pressure Warning

KIA Sorento (2005) - Engine Oil Pressure Warning - 1

This warning light indicates the engine oil pressure is low.

If the warning light illuminates while driving:

  1. Drive safely to the side of the road and stop.

  2. With the engine off, check the engine oil level. If the level is low, add oil as required.

If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not available, call an Authorized Kia Dealer or other competent repair shop.

\* NOTICE

If the engine is not stopped immediately, severe damage could result.

Charging System Warning

KIA Sorento (2005) - Charging System Warning - 1

This warning light indicates a malfunction of either the generator or electrical charging system.

If the warning light comes on while the vehicle is in motion:

  1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
  2. With the engine off, check the generator drive belt for looseness or breakage.
  3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a problem exists somewhere in the electrical charging system. Have an Authorized Kia Dealer or other competent repair shop correct the problem as soon as possible.

\* NOTICE - Diesel

Do not drive the vehicle with a loose or broken generator belt; the engine could be damaged by overheating because this belt also drives the engine cooling fan.

Safety Belt Warning

KIA Sorento (2005) - Safety Belt Warning - 1

As a reminder to the driver and passenger, the safety belt warning light will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON regardless of belt fastening.

Rear Fog Light Indicator (If equipped)

KIA Sorento (2005) - Rear Fog Light Indicator (If equipped) - 1

This light comes on when the rear fog lights are ON.

Front Fog Light Indicator (If equipped)

KIA Sorento (2005) - Front Fog Light Indicator (If equipped) - 1

This light comes on when the front fog lights are ON.

Shift Pattern Indicators (A/T:30-40LEi)

KIA Sorento (2005) - Shift Pattern Indicators (A/T:30-40LEi) - 1

The individual indicators illuminate to show the shift lever selection.

Shift Pattern Indicators (A/T:A5SR1)

KIA Sorento (2005) - Shift Pattern Indicators (A/T:A5SR1) - 1

The individual indicators illuminate to show the shift lever selection.

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning

KIA Sorento (2005) - Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning - 1

Parking brake warning

This light is illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position. The warning light should go off when the parking brake is released.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

Low brake fluid level warning

If the warning light remains on, it may indicate that the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low.

If the warning light remains on:

  1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.

  2. With the engine stopped, check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required. Then check all brake components for fluid leaks.

  3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are found, the warning light remains on or the brakes do not operate properly. Have it towed to any Authorized Kia Dealer for a brake system inspection and necessary repairs.

To check bulb operation, check whether the parking brake and brake fluid warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is in the ON position

Low brake vacuum pressure warning (for diesel)

If the brake warning light remains on after adding brake fluid and the brake pedal becomes heavier or harder, it may indicate that the brake vacuum pump has any problem. Therefore you should avoid high speed driving or sudden stop, and you should depress the brake pedal deeper and harder than usual in braking. Make sure to have the brake system checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING

Driving the vehicle with a warning light on is dangerous. If the brake warning light remains on, have the brakes checked and repaired immediately by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

Rear Hatch

Ajar Warning

KIA Sorento (2005) - Ajar Warning - 1

This warning light activates when the rear hatch or rear hatch window are not closed securely.

Low Fuel Level

Warning

KIA Sorento (2005) - Warning - 1

This warning light indicates the fuel tank is nearly empty. The warning light will come on when the fuel level has dropped to about 12 liters (3.1 US gal.). Refuel as soon as possible.

Rear Hatch Window

Defroster Indicator

KIA Sorento (2005) - Defroster Indicator - 1

This light comes on when the rear hatch defroster switch is depressed to remove the frost on the rear hatch glass.

Press the switch again to shut off the defroster when the frost is removed.

The rear hatch window defroster will automatically turn off after 20 minutes.

It will also turn off whenever you remove the ignition key.

Door Ajar Warning

KIA Sorento (2005) - Door Ajar Warning - 1

Immobilizer Indicator (If equipped)

KIA Sorento (2005) - Immobilizer Indicator (If equipped) - 1

Malfunction Indicator (If equipped)

KIA Sorento (2005) - Malfunction Indicator (If equipped) - 1

This warning light comes on when a door is not closed securely with the ignition in any position.

This light comes on when the immobilizer code is input (limp-home procedure) to start the engine.

Headlight High Beam Indicator

KIA Sorento (2005) - Headlight High Beam Indicator - 1

Glow Indicator (Diesel Engine Only)

KIA Sorento (2005) - Glow Indicator (Diesel Engine Only) - 1

This indicator light is part of the Engine Control System which monitors various emission control system components. If this light illuminates while driving, it indicates that a potential problem has been detected somewhere in the emission control system.

This indicator activates when the headlights are on and in the high beam position or when the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.

This light is turned on during warm-up and turned off after it.

\* NOTICE

If the glow indicator continues to illuminate after the engine has warmed up or while driving, check the system by an Authorized kia Dealer or other competent repair shop as soon as possible.

Generally, your vehicle will continue to be drivable and will not need towing, but have the system checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer or other competent repair shop as soon as possible.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

CAUTION

Prolonged driving with the Emission Control System Malfunction Indicator Light ( ^1 ) illuminated may cause damage to the emission control systems which could effect drivability and/or fuel economy.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

CAUTION - For Europe

If the Emission Control System Malfunction Indicator Light ( ) illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage is possible which could result in loss of engine power. Have the Engine Control System inspected as soon as possible by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

Air Bag Warning (If equipped)

This warning light will blink for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. If this indicator does not do this or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, see an Authorized Kia Dealer or another competent service center for immediate service.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Air Bag Warning (If equipped) - 1

Auto Cruise Indicator (If equipped)

KIA Sorento (2005) - Auto Cruise Indicator (If equipped) - 1

Gasoline engine:

The indicator light illuminates when the cruise control system is activated.
Diesel engine:
The indicator light illuminates when the CRUISE main switch is pressed.

4WD Indicator Light (If equipped) (Part Time 4WD Only)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the 4WD indicator light will come on and then go off in a few seconds.

The 4WD indicator light will illuminate when the transfer shift knob is set to 4HI position (Part time 4WD only).

KIA Sorento (2005) - 4WD Indicator Light (If equipped) (Part Time 4WD Only) - 1

4WD LOW Indicator Light (If equipped)

KIA Sorento (2005) - 4WD LOW Indicator Light (If equipped) - 1

When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the 4WD LOW indicator will come on and then go off in a few seconds. The 4WD LOW indicator light comes on when the transfer shift knob is set to 4WD LOW position.

Part-time 4WD : 4LO position Full-time 4WD : LOW position

CAUTION

If the 4WD indicator light (1 - 1) blinks (full-time 4WD) or 4WD indicator light (1 - 1) and 4WD LOW indicator light (4WD / LOW) illuminate at the same time (part time 4WD), this indicates that there is a malfunction in the 4WD system. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an Authorized Kla Dealer as soon as possible.

Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Indicator (If equipped)

KIA Sorento (2005) - Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Indicator (If equipped) - 1

This warning light indicates the washer fluid reservoir is near empty. Refill the washer fluid as soon as possible.

Sedimentor Level Warning (Diesel Engine Only)

KIA Sorento (2005) - Sedimentor Level Warning (Diesel Engine Only) - 1

The light comes on if water in the sedimentor is accumulated more than normal. Drain water if the light is turned on. Driving with the light on may damage the engine.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

Door Ajar Warning Chime

If a door is opened while driving the vehicle more than 5km/h, the warning chime will sound.

Seat Belt Reminder (If equipped)

If the driver's lap/shoulder belt is not fastened when the key is turned ON, the safety belt warning light illuminate for 6 seconds.

If the driver's lap/shoulder belt is not fastened when you drive over 10 km/h, the safety belt warning light blinks for one minute and after that the chime sounds at the same time.

Parking Start Warning Chime (If equipped)

If you drive over 10 km/h with the parking brake applied, the parking start warning chime will sound.

Key Reminder Warning Chime

If the driver's door is opened and the ignition key is left with the ignition switch in the LOCK or ACC position, the key reminder warning chime will sound. This is to prevent you from locking your keys in the vehicle.

Safety Belt Warning Chime (If equipped)

If the driver's lap/shoulder belt is not fastened when the key is turned ON, the safety belt warning chime sounds for approximately 6 seconds. At this time, if the safety belt is fastened, the chime will stop at once.

MULTI-METER (IF EQUIPPED)
KIA Sorento (2005) - Safety Belt Warning Chime (If equipped) - 1

text_image 2BLA430A

The Functions Of Multi-Meter

  1. Azimuth Compass
  2. Relative Altimeter
  3. Barometer
  4. Tempmeter (if equipped)

How to Adjust the Multi-Meter

Switch function

Mode/Set Switch Function

  1. Selection of modes: If you push the MODE/SET switch for less than 1 second, the mode will be selected as follows.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Mode/Set Switch Function - 1

  1. Correction of Relative Azimuth Compass Indicator.
  2. Correction of Terrestrial deviation of the Azimuth Compass.
  3. Clear the altitude to "0" (zero).

Up/Down Switch

  1. Correction of the terrestrial deviation angle of the Azimuth Compass.
  2. Conversion of the Relative Altimeter. units (m ⇔ ft)
  3. Conversion of the Tempmeter. units (°C ⇔ °F)

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

text_image 20 N W 2BLA431

Electric Azimuth Compass

It displays azimuth according to the vehicle's driving direction.

The indication is displayed only when the vehicle is in motion.

\* NOTICE

If new vehicle is first driven or if the battery has been disconnected, correct the azimuth indicator before driving.

Correcting Azimuth Indicator

It is needed to correct the error between a current azimuth to terrestrial magnetism sensor and the displayed azimuth in the vehicle position.

How to correct azimuth indicator

  1. If you push the MODE/SET switch and hold for more than 1.5 second and less than 4.5 seconds, the azimuth indicator (DRT) will start blinking with the vehicle's present direction.

  2. Slowly (about 5km/h, 3mph) rotate the vehicle one turn(360 degree) within 128 seconds.

The rotation could be made at any direction(left or right) in an open space.

  1. When the rotation is finished, the azimuth compass indicator (DRT) will stop blinking and the error correction is completed.

If the indicator continues to blink, rotate the vehicle a bit more until the blinking stops.

The azimuth compass indicator correction will be cancelled:

  1. If you press MODE/SET switch for more than 0.1 second.
  2. When the vehicle is not rotated within 128 seconds after the blinking of the indicator.

\*NOTICE

The azimuth may display abnormally in specific places (tunnel, parking lot in building, underground parking lot, near transformer substation, etc.). It is normal and the azimuth is displayed normally when escaping above mentioned places.

How to correct terrestrial deviation.

  1. Press MODE/SET switch for more than 4.5 seconds, then the present terrestrial deviation angle value will be displayed after DRT blinking for 4.5 seconds.

  2. Press UP or DOWN switch for more than 1 second to correct the Azimuth Compass within 30 seconds. If you press UP switch, the Azimuth compass will move 5 degree to the East and it will move 5 degree to West if you press DOWN switch.

For the correct terrestrial deviation angle value for your location, refer to the contour line map included. If your place is located in between the terrestrial deviation contour line, you can apply any value (up or down value) for your location in the contour line map.

The initial deviation angle is set to 5^ W.

Terrestrial Correction Range:

West 30° \~ East 30°.

  1. To finish the correction, press MODE/SET switch for more than 1 second.

\* NOTICE

The terrestrial deviation setting will be remembered even if the battery has been disconnected.

The terrestrial deviation angle correction will be cancelled:

  1. If you press MODE/SET switch for less than 1 second.

  2. If you don't correct the terrestrial deviation angle within 30 seconds.

The Contour Line Map for Terrestrial Deviation Angle Correction
KIA Sorento (2005) - The terrestrial deviation angle correction will be cancelled: - 1

heatmap | Region | Value | |--------|-------| | North America | 15E | | Europe | 10E | | Asia | 5E | | South America | 15E | | Africa | 10E | | Australia | 5E | | Central America | 15E | | Middle East | 20E | | Southeast Asia | 25E | | South Asia | 30E | | North America (Europe) | 10W | | North America (Asia) | 15W | | North America (South America) | 15E | | North America (Africa) | 10E | | Europe (North America) | 20W | | Europe (Europe) | 30W | | Europe (Asia) | 35W | | Europe (South America) | 40W | | Europe (Africa) | 20W | | Africa (North America) | 15W | | Africa (Asia) | 10W | | Africa (South America) | 5W | | Africa (Africa) | 10W | | Africa (Africa) | 5W | | South America (North America) | 15E | | South America (Asia) | 10E | | South America (South America) | 5E | | South America (Africa) | 5E | | South America (Africa) | 10E | | South America (Africa) | 15E | | South America (Africa) | 10E | | South America (Africa) | 5E | | South America (Africa) | 10W | | South America (Africa) | 5W | | South America (Africa) | 5W | | South America (Africa) | 5W | | South America (Africa) | 5W | | South America (Africa) | 5W | | South America (Africa) | 5W | | South America (Africa) | 5W | | South America (Africa) | 5W | | South America (Africa) | 5W | | South America (Africa) | 5M | | South America (Africa) | 5M | | South America (Africa) | 5M | | South America (Africa) | 5M | | South America (Africa) | 5M | | South America (Africa) | 5M | | South America (Africa) | 5M | | South America (Africa) | 5M | | South America (Africa) | 5M | | South America (Africa) | 5M |

KIA Sorento (2005) - The terrestrial deviation angle correction will be cancelled: - 2

text_image 800 1880" 800 4000t. 2BLA432

Relative Altimeter

Relative altimeter is used when you want to know the altitude of the specific location. And it displays by comparing the altitude of the specific location with the current altitude which the vehicle is located in.

When you want to know the difference of altitude between the destination and the starting point:

  1. Press MODE/SET switch for more than 1 second to reset the current altitude to 0 (zero).
  2. After arriving, the displayed altitude is the difference of altitude between the destination and the starting point.
  3. Converting the Altimeter units: Press the "UP" or "DOWN" switch for more than 1 second to transfer the altimeter unit from "m" to "ft" or "ft" to "m".

\* NOTICE

The Relative Altimeter may display different altitude at the same place as the atmospheric pressure varies at one place.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \* NOTICE - 1

text_image i0 15 2BLA433

Barometer

The current air pressure is displayed in hPa units where the measurement range is from 600 hPa to 1,100 hPa. (The minimum is 5 hPa)

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

\*NOTICE

The Barometer may display different air pressure at one place due to the changes in the atmospheric pressure at the place.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \*NOTICE - 1

text_image 55°C 149° 2BLA434

Tempmeter (If equipped)

If you select the Tempmeter, the current outer temperature is displayed in 1°C (1°F) where the temperature range is between -30°C \~ 65 °C (-30°F \~ 149°F).

If you press the UP or DOWN switch for more than 1 second, the temperature unit would transfer to °C from °F or °F from °C.

LIGHTING

Battery Saver Function

  • The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically turns off the small light when the driver removes the ignition key and opens the driver-side door.
  • With this feature, the taillight will be turned off automatically if the driver parks on the side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on when the ignition switch is removed, perform the following :

1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the tail-lights OFF and ON again using the light switch on the steering column.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Battery Saver Function - 1

text_image GT 2HG ID RBLA435A

Lighting Control

The light switch has a Headlight and a Taillight position.

To turn the lights on, turn the knob at the end of the control lever.

Taillight position

When the light switch is in the taillight position (1st position), the tail, position, license and instrument panel lights are ON.

Headlight position

When the light switch is in the head-light position (2nd position) the head, tail, position, license and instrument panel lights are ON.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

text_image RBLA436B

Auto Light Position (If equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTO light position (3rd position), the tail-lights and headlights will be turned automatically ON or OFF according to the external illumination.

\*NOTICE

  • Never place things on the sensor which is located in the instrument panel to ensure a better control of the auto light system.
  • Don't clean the sensor using a window cleaner.
  • If your vehicle has a coating on the front windshield, the AUTO light system may malfunction.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \*NOTICE - 1

text_image RBLA436A

High - Beam Operation

To turn on the high beam headlights, push the lever away from you. Pull it back for low beams.

The high-beam indicator will light when the headlight high beams are switched on.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on for a prolonged time while the engine is not running.

KIA Sorento (2005) - High - Beam Operation - 1

text_image ON OFF OFF RBLA438

Flashing headlights

To flash the headlights, pull the lever towards you. It will return the normal position when released. The head-light switch does not need to be on to use this flashing feature.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Flashing headlights - 1

text_image Left turn Left lane change OFF Right lane change Right turn RBLA439

Turn signals

The ignition switch must be on for the turn signals to function. To turn on the turn signals, move the lever up or down. Green arrow indicators on the instrument panel indicate which turn signal is operating. They will self-cancel after a turn is completed. If the indicator continues to flash after a turn, manually return the lever to the OFF position.

Lane change signals

To signal a lane change, move the turn signal lever slightly and hold it in position. The lever will return to the OFF position when released.

If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

text_image ON OFF OFF 30Ω AUTO RBLA440

Daytime Running Light (If equipped)

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, and it is especially helpful after dawn and before sunset. The DRL system will make your low-beam headlights turn OFF when: A148B T.The taillight switch is ON.

Front Fog Light (If equipped)

To turn the front fog lights ON, turn the taillights ON after starting the engine and then turn the front fog light switch to ON position. To turn it OFF, turn it to OFF position or turn the taillights OFF.

  1. Engine stops.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Front Fog Light (If equipped) - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard, air vent, and control panel (no text or symbols)

Headlight Leveling Device (If equipped)

This device is provided to avoid dazzling other road users. Headlamp level can be adjusted by rotating the thumb-wheel switch in accordance with the following settings.

Description of switch

PositionLoading on
Frt. seatsRear seatsRear Trunk
01 driver -
2 persons -
1 2 persons 3 persons -
2 2 persons 3 persons 258 kg
3 1 driver -514 kg

KIA Sorento (2005) - Headlight Leveling Device (If equipped) - 1

text_image 8:00 H M C K L A O K L A K L A K L A K L A K L A K L A K L A K L A K L A K L A K L A K L A K L A K L A K L A K L A K L A K N A K N A K N A K N A K N A K N A K N A K N A K N A K N A K N A K N A K N A K N A

Rear Fog Light (If equipped)

To turn the rear fog light ON, turn the headlight switch ON and press the rear fog light switch.

To turn it OFF, press the rear fog light switch again or turn the headlight OFF.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

WIPERS AND WASHERS
KIA Sorento (2005) - DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

text_image OFF PAT LO HI RBLA442A

\*NOTICE

If there is a heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, you have to wait for about 10 minutes for the proper windshield operation.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \*NOTICE - 1

text_image RBLA445 OFF INT LO HI COFF INT COFF INT COFF INT

Windshield Wipers

The ignition switch must be ON to operate the wipers and washers. Move the switch to desired position.

- One touch wiper INT - Intermittent wiper operation

LO - Normal wiper speed HI - Fast wiper speed

Variable Intermittent Wipers

Set the lever to the INT position and choose the desired wiper interval by turning the ring.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Variable Intermittent Wipers - 1

text_image RBLA446

One - Touch Wiper

For a single wiping cycle, push the lever upward and release it with the lever in the OFF position.

The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is pushed upward and held.

\* NOTICE

• To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
- To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \* NOTICE - 1

text_image OFF INT ON T T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 RBLA447

Windshield Washers

In the OFF position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield and to run the wipers 2-3 cycles.

Use this function when the wind-shield is dirty.

The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

If the washer does not work, check the washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not sufficient, you will need to add appropriate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid to the washer reservoir.

The reservoir filler neck is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side.

\* NOTICE

To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.

CAUTION

Do not use the washer in freezing temperatures without 1st warming the windshield with the defrosters; the washer solution could freeze on contact with the windshield and obscure your vision.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

text_image OFF INT ON F CFF INT LO 1F RBLA448

Rear Window Wiper and Washer Switch

The rear window wiper and washer switch is located at the end of the wiper and washer switch lever. Turn the switch to desired position to operate the rear wiper and washer. When the rear hatch window is opened the rear window wiper and washer does not work.

  • Spraying washer fluid and wiping
    INT - Intermittent wiper operation ON - Normal wiper opertion
  • Spraying washer fluid and wiping

\* NOTICE

To prevent possible damage to the rear window wiper, do not open the rear hatch window while the rear window wiper and washer is operating.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \* NOTICE - 1

text_image 8:00 AIR OFF AUTO AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OFF AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/OCC AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/Occ AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC AUTO/OCC

Headlight Washer (If equipped)

To operate the headlight washer, on the headlight switch while the engine is running. Press the headlight washer button to operate the washer. Release the button to stop the operation.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

DEFROSTER

Front (If equipped)
KIA Sorento (2005) - DEFROSTER - 1

text_image 0:00 H M C I A T U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A U A

Rear
KIA Sorento (2005) - DEFROSTER - 2

text_image 8:00 2BLC450C

The defroster clears frost, fog and thin ice from the interior and exterior of the front windshield and rear window, while the engine is running.

\* NOTICE

  • To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface of the bottom of the front windshield and the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window.
    • To prevent the battery from being discharged, operate the defroster only while the engine is running.
  • The front windshield defroster is designed to defrost wiper blades. If you want to defrost and defog on the front windshield, refer to "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging" in this section.

If your vehicle is equipped with the outside rearview mirror defroster, you can also clear frost from the mirrors by depressing this rear window defroster switch.

To activate the defroster, depress the corresponding defroster switch located on the center console switch panel. Front windshield and rear window defroster indicators illuminate when the defrosters are on. The defrosters automatically turn off after about 20 minutes, or when the ignition switch is turned off. To turn off the defroster, press the corresponding defroster switch again.

If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.

If your vehicle is equipped with an outside rearview mirror defroster, it will be operating at the same time when you operate the rear window defroster.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

KIA Sorento (2005) - HAZARD WARNING FLASHER - 1

text_image 8:00 2BLC450D

The hazard warning flasher causes the rear tail lights and front turn signal lights to flash on and off, which serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise caution when approaching or passing your vehicle.

To activate the flasher, depress the hazard warning flasher switch. This switch operates in any ignition switch position.

To turn the flashers off, depress the switch again.

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

KIA Sorento (2005) - MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) - 1

text_image 1 2 3 1 2 3 0 4 FUSH PUGH A/C 4 5
  1. Fan speed control knob
  2. Mode selection knob
  3. Temperature control knob
  4. Air flow control button
  5. Air conditioning button (if equipped)

2BLA464

KIA Sorento (2005) - MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) - 2

text_image 1BLA210

Fan Speed Control Knob

Four (4) adjustable fan speeds are provided which increase as the number increases. The ignition switch must be in the ON position for fan operation.

0 - Fan off
1 - Low speed
2 - Medium speed
3 - High speed
4 - Maximum speed

KIA Sorento (2005) - Fan Speed Control Knob - 1

text_image PUSH AC 1BLA209

Temperature Control Knob

The temperature control knob allows you to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation system. To change the air temperature in the passenger compartment turn the knob to the right for warm and hot air or left for cooler air.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Temperature Control Knob - 1

text_image RISH 2BLA472

Mode Selection Knob

The mode selection knob controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system. The air from outlet port D flows at any mode. Close the ventilation outlets using the knob to block the air flow if you do not want the air.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

text_image A A A A D B B D C C RBI.A470

Face position

KIA Sorento (2005) - Face position - 1

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet. (outlet port: ⓐ Ⓟ

Face - floor position

KIA Sorento (2005) - Face - floor position - 1

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor. The air to the floor is warmer than the air to the face (except when the temperature control is set to the extreme cold position). (outlet port: B C D)

Floor position

KIA Sorento (2005) - Floor position - 1

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defroster. (outlet port: © Ⓓ

Floor - defrost position

KIA Sorento (2005) - Floor - defrost position - 1

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

(outlet port: Ⓐ Ⓒ) Ⓓ

When the floor-defrost position is selected the air-conditioning (If eupipped) will be automatically turned on and outside (fresh) air mode will be selected. If you don't want the air-conditioning refer to "How to cancel forced air-conditioning operation in floor-defrost and defrost position" in windshield defrosting and defogging section.

Defrost position

KIA Sorento (2005) - Defrost position - 1

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

(outlet port: Ⓐ) Ⓓ

When the defrost position is selected the air-conditioning (if equipped) will be automatically turned on and outside (fresh) air mode will be selected. If you don't want the air-conditioning refer to "How to cancel forced air-conditioning operation in floor-defrost and defrost position" in windshield defrosting and defogging section.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Defrost position - 2

text_image 2BLA472A

Air Flow Control Button

It is recommended that under normal conditions the outside (fresh) air position be selected.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

Recirculated air position

KIA Sorento (2005) - Recirculated air position - 1

If you press the air intake control button once (recirculate), almost all outside air flow into the vehicle is shut off, and air within the vehicle will be recirculated.

This position can be used temporarily for maximum heating or cooling (if equipped with an air conditioning) and to help prevent undesirable outside air flow into the vehicle.

CAUTION

Continued climate control system operation in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

WARNING

Don't sleep in a vehicle with air conditioning system on. It may cause serious harm or death to passengers due to rare density of oxygen and drop of body temperature.

Outside (fresh) air position

KIA Sorento (2005) - Outside (fresh) air position - 1

If you press the air intake control button again, the air position will be changed to outside (fresh) air and air will enter the ventilation system from outside the vehicle. Use this position for normal ventilation and heating.

Whenever you start the engine, the air flow control will be set at outside (fresh) air position. If you want the recirculated air position, press the corresponding button.

To cancel the forced outside(fresh) air position when the engine has started, refer to the canceling procedure in "Windshield Defrosting and Defogging" section.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Outside (fresh) air position - 2

1BLA211

Air Conditioning Button (If equipped)

Push the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on. The indicator light in the button will illuminate when the fan speed control knob is on. Push the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

System Operation

Ventilation

  1. Set the mode selection knob to the position.
  2. Set the air intake control button to the desired air position.
  3. Set the temperature control knob to the desired position.
  4. Set the fan speed control knob to the desired speed.

Heating

  1. Set the mode selection knob to the √ position.
  2. Set the air intake control button to the desired air position.

  3. Set the temperature control knob to the desired position.

  4. Set the fan speed control knob to the desired speed.
  5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.
  6. If cool air is desired at face level for bi-level operation, set the mode selection knob to the position.
  7. If the windshield fogs up, set the mode selection knob to the position.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

Air conditioning (if equipped)

All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled with environmentally friendly R134a refrigerant which is not damaging to the ozone layer.

  1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
  2. Set the mode selection knob to the face position.
  3. Set the air intake control button to the outside air or recirculated air position.
  4. Set the temperature control knob to the desired position.
  5. Set the fan speed control knob to the desired speed.

  6. Adjust the fan speed control knob and temperature control knob to maintain maximum comfort.

  7. If warmer air is desired at floor level for bi-level operation, set the mode selection knob to the position and adjust the temperature control knob to maintain maximum comfort.

  8. When maximum cooling is desired, rotate the temperature control knob to the extreme left position and set the air intake control button to the recirculated air position, then set the fan speed control knob to the highest speed.

\* NOTICE

When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.

Air Conditioning System Operation Tips

  • If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.
  • To help reduce moisture inside of windows on rainy humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.
  • During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed at idle as the air conditioning compressor cycles on. This is a normal system operation characteristics.

  • Use the air conditioning system every month if only for a few minutes.
    • After the use of the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even pudding) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristics.

  • The air conditioning system includes a function that will automatically turns the air conditioning compressor off if engine coolant temperature approaches an over heating level. The air conditioning compressor operation will resume once engine coolant temperature returns to the normal range. Also, the air conditioning compressor is automatically turned off for a few seconds when the accelerator is fully depressed.

  • When operating the air conditioning system use the outside (fresh) air position.

  • Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position does provide maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The automatic climate control system is controlled by simply setting the desired temperature.

KIA Sorento (2005) - AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) - 1

text_image 1 2 3 4 5 ▲ TEMP AUTO OFF AUTO AMB A/C MODE ▲ AMB A/C 6 7 8 9 10 11 2BLC465A
  1. Temperature Control Button

  2. AUTO (Automatic Control) Button

  3. Indicator Light

  4. Mode Selection Button

  5. Fan Speed Control Button

  6. Air Conditioning Button

  7. OFF Button

  8. Defrost Button

  9. Outside (fresh) air position Button

  10. AMB (ambient) Button

  11. Recirculated air position Button

Automatic Operation

AUTO

The Full Automatic Temperature Control (FATC) system automatically controls the heating and cooling system as follows;

  1. Push the AUTO button. The indicator light will come on and the modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically by temperature setting.
  2. Push the TEMP button to set the desired temperature.

If the temperature setting is LO (17°C / 62°F), the air conditioning system will operate continuously.

  1. To turn the automatic operation off, press any button except temperature control button and AMB button. If you press the mode selection button, air-conditioning button, defrost button, air intake control button, fan speed button, the selected function will be controlled manually while other functions operate automatically.

\* NOTICE

Never place anything over the sensor located on the instrument panel to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.

\* NOTICE

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode will reset as Centigrade degree.

This is normal condition and you can adjust the temperature mode from Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows;

Press the temperature down button 3 seconds or more with the AMB button held down. The display shows that the unit of temperature is adjusted to Centigrade or Fahrenheit.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Operation

The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually as well by pushing buttons other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system sequentially works according the order of buttons selected.

The functions of the buttons which are not selected will be controlled automatically.

Press the AUTO button in order to convert to automatic control of the system.

Temperature Control Button

The temperature will increase to the maximum HI (32°C / 90°F) by pushing the up button. Each push of the button will cause the temperature to increase by 0.5 °C (1°F).

The temperature will decrease to the minimum LO (17°C / 62°F) by pushing the down button. Each push of the button will cause the temperature to decrease by 0.5°C (1°F).

TEMP

Ambient Button MB

The ambient temperature will be displayed for 5 sec. before returning to the previous indication.

If you press AMB button again, the previous indication will be displayed.

Fan Speed Control Button

KIA Sorento (2005) - Fan Speed Control Button - 1

The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by pressing the appropriate fan speed control button.

The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered.

Pressing the "OFF" button turns off the fan.

Air Flow Control Button

This is used to select outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position, push the control button.

Recirculated air position

KIA Sorento (2005) - Recirculated air position - 1

  • Fan off
  • Low speed
  • Medium speed
    ♣ - High speed
    ♣ - Maximum speed

The indicator light is illuminated when the air intake control is in recirculated air position.

With the recirculated air position selected, air from passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

KIA Sorento (2005) - Outside (fresh) air position - 1

The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the air intake control is set to the outside (fresh) air position.

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

When you start the engine with manually selected recirculated air position before the engine off, the air flow control will be set at outside(fresh) air position.

To cancel the forced outside(fresh) air position when the engine has started, refer to the canceling procedure in windshield defrosting and defogging section.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

\*NOTICE

It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating in recirculated air position will cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the “recirculated air position” selected, will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

WARNING

  • Continued climate control system operation in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.
  • Do not sleep in a vehicle with air conditioning system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.

Mode Selection Button

MODE

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

The air flow outlet port is same as manual climate control system.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Mode Selection Button - 1

Face position

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet. (outlet port: Ⓑ ⓟ)

Face - floor position

KIA Sorento (2005) - Face - floor position - 1

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor. The air to the floor is warmer than the air to the face (except when the temperature control is set to the extreme cold position). (outlet port: B C)

Floor position

KIA Sorento (2005) - Floor position - 1

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defroster. (outlet port: © ①)

Floor - defrost position

KIA Sorento (2005) - Floor - defrost position - 1

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters. (outlet port: A C) D

The air conditioning will automatically operate based on the ambient temperature and outside(fresh) air position will be selected automatically. If you don't want the air-conditioning or outside (fresh) air position press the corresponding button to cancel the operation.

Defrost Button

KIA Sorento (2005) - Defrost Button - 1

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

(outlet port: Ⓐ)

When the defrost button is pressed the outside(fresh) air position will automatically selected and the air will be discharged through the windshield defrost vents. The air conditioning will automatically operate based on ambient temperature. If you don't want the air-conditioning or outside (fresh) air position press the corresponding button to cancel the operation.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

KIA Sorento (2005) - DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE - 1

text_image A/C 1BLA217

Air Conditioning Button

Push the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on. The indicator light in the button will illuminate when the fan speed control knob is on. Push the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

Fuel-fired Heater (If Equipped)

This fuel-fired heater supplies additional heat to the interior compartment with a low fuel consumption to compensate the heat provided by engine alone.

The following 3 conditions should be meet at the same time for automatic operation of the fuel-fired heater.

- Engine runs.

  • Ambient temperature is lower than 5^ .
  • Coolant temperature is lower than 68^ .

A cleaning process of the fuel-fired heater will be performed automatically when the heater is not operated due to increase of coolant temperature and ignition off.

During cleaning process, supplied fuel in the heater will be burnt completely and any smoke will be expelled. It is a necessary process for next operation and durability of the heater and takes about 1\~3 minutes.

\* NOTICE

• The following symptoms will occur and it is normal.
- A white smoke may come out from the fuel-fired heater exhaust pipe during operation of the heater. However, when an excessive black smoke is discharged, the fuel-fired heater should be inspected.
- A "buk-buk" noise from the heater is a noise to form flame for combustion.
- When the heater is operated at full load, a "Wooing" noise occurs.
- When shutting off the engine during heater operation, a "Wing" noise occurs to perform the cleaning process.
- When refueling, stop operation of the fuel-fired heater by shutting off the engine.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING (MANUAL TYPE)

KIA Sorento (2005) - WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING (MANUAL TYPE) - 1

To Defog Inside Windshield

  1. Select the floor-defrost (or defrost (position.
  2. Select desired temperature.
  3. Select any fan speed except "0".
  4. The air-conditioning (if equipped) will be turned on automatically and outside (fresh) air will be selected.

CAUTION

Do not use defrost position during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

To Defrost Outside Windshield

  1. Select the defrost (position.
  2. Set the fan speed to the "3" or "4" position.
  3. Set the temperature to the extreme hot position.
  4. The air-conditioning (if equipped) will be turned on automatically and outside (fresh) air will be selected.

  5. For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control knob to the extreme right/hot position and the fan speed control knob to the highest speed.

  6. If warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging, set the mode selection knob to the floor- defrost position.
  7. Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.
  8. Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up inside of the windshield.

KIA Sorento (2005) - To Defrost Outside Windshield - 1

text_image ① ② ③ 2BLA475

How to cancel forced air-conditioning operation and outside(fresh) air position in floor-defrost and defrost position ;

When you select the Floor-Defrost or Defrost position, the system automatically turns on the air-conditioning system and outside (fresh) air position will be selected.

If you don't want air-conditioning and outside (fresh) air position when operating in either of these modes you can turn off the air-conditioning system operation by performing the following:

1) Turn the fan speed control knob to the "0" position.
2) Turn the mode selection knob to the defrost position ( ☐ )
3) Push the air intake control button ( ) at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
Then the indicator light in the air intake control button ( ) will blink 3 times with 0.5 second of interval.

If you want to return to the automatic air conditioning system and outside (fresh) air position, repeat the same procedure.

Follow the same procedure if you want to cancel or return to the forced outside (fresh) air position when you start the engine.

DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING (AUTOMATIC TYPE)

KIA Sorento (2005) - WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING (AUTOMATIC TYPE) - 1

To Defog Inside Windshield

  1. Press the defrost button (
  2. Select desired temperature.
  3. Select the fan speed except OFF (9 position.
  4. The air-conditioning will be turned on according to the detected ambient temperature and outside (fresh) air position will be selected.

If you don't want the air-conditioning or outside (fresh) air position press the corresponding button to cancel the operation.

CAUTION

Do not use defrost position during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

To Defrost Outside Windshield

  1. Press the defrost button ( )
  2. Set any fan speed to the ♣r ♣ position.
  3. Set temperature to the extreme hot (25°C\~32°C) position.
  4. The air-conditioning will be turned on according to the detected ambient temperature and outside (fresh) air position will be selected.
    If you don't want the air-conditioning or outside (fresh) air position press the corresponding button to cancel the operation.

KIA Sorento (2005) - To Defrost Outside Windshield - 1

text_image Diagram showing two labeled components with directional arrows and a starburst pattern, likely illustrating a technical or schematic concept.

How to cancel forced air-conditioning operation and outside (fresh) air position in floor-defrost and defrost position ;

  1. Select the defrost position pressing defrost button ( ☐)
  2. While holding the air conditioning button A/C depressed, depress the recirculated air position button (-) at least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The indicator light in the recirculated air position button will blink 3 times with 0.5 second interval.

Follow the same procedure if you want to cancel or return to the forced outside (fresh) air position when you start the engine with recirculated air position selected manually before the engine off.

DRIVING TIPS

Fuel Requirements 5-2

Emission Control System 5-4

Before Driving 5-6

Suggestions for Economical Operation 5-8

Special Driving Conditions 5-9

Using Four-Wheel Drive 5-15

Trailer Towing 5-33

Overloading 5-42

Loading Your Vehicle 5-42

Vehicle Identification Number 5-43

DRIVING TIPS

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Gasoline Engine (Unleaded)

Your new Kia vehicle is designed to use only unleaded fuel having an octane rating of 91 or higher.

Your new Kia is designed to obtain maximum performance with UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.

\* NOTICE

NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is detrimental to the catalytic converter and will damage the engine control system's oxygen sensor and affect emission control.

Never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what Kia has specified. (Consult an Authorized Kia Dealer for details.)

Gasoline Engine (Leaded)

In countries using LEADED FUEL, your new Kia vehicle must use LEADED FUEL. Your new Kia Vehicle is designed to correspond to LEADED FUEL specifically. Please check your vehicle whether your vehicle can use LEADED FUEL or not.

Gasoline Containing Alcohol and Methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol (also known as wood alcohol) are being marketed along with or instead of leaded or unleaded gasoline.

Do not use gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or gasohol containing any methanol. Either of these fuels may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or driveability problems may not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty if they result from the use of:

  1. Gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol.
  2. Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol.
  3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

\* NOTICE

Never use gasohol which contains methanol. Discontinue use of any gasohol product which impairs drivability.

DRIVING TIPS

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM - Gasoline Engine Vehicle Modifications

This vehicle should not be modified. Modification of your Kia could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.

In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty.

Engine Exhaust Gas Precautions (Carbon Monoxide)

Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide. Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous and could be lethal if inhaled.

- Carbon monoxide can be present with other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected and repaired immediately by an authorized Kia dealer or other competent repair shop. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into your vehicle, drive it only with all the windows fully open. Have your vehicle checked and repaired immediately.

- Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as garages) any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area.

  • When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running, adjust the ventilation system (as needed) to draw outside air into the vehicle.
  • Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the engine running.
  • Inspect the emission control system whenever engine stalls.
  • If the engine stalls or fails to start, do not re-engaging the starter over 3 times. If the engine stalls or re-engaged excessively, it may cause damage to the emission control system.

Operating Precautions for Catalytic Converters

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautions must be observed:

  • Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gasoline engine (unleaded).
  • Do not park the vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as dry grass, paper, leaves, etc. Under certain conditions, they could be ignited by a hot exhaust system.
  • Do not operate the vehicle when there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.
  • Do not misuse or abuse the engine. Examples of misuse are coasting with the ignition off and descending steep grades in gear with the ignition off.

  • Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods (5 minutes or more).

  • Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by a qualified technician.

Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle. Additionally, such actions could void your warranties.

DRIVING TIPS

BEFORE DRIVING

Before entering vehicle:

  • Be sure that all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean.
  • Check the condition of the tyres.
  • Check under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.
  • Be sure there are no obstacles behind you if you intend to back up.

Necessary Inspections

Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine coolant, brake/clutch fluid, and washer fluid should be checked on a regular basis, with the exact interval depending on the fluid. Further details are provided in Section 7, Maintenance.

Before Starting

  • Close and lock all doors.
  • Position the seat so that all controls are easily reached.
  • Adjust the inside and outside rearview mirrors.
  • Be sure that all lights work.
  • Check all gauges.
  • Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
  • Release the parking brake and make sure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are familiar with your vehicle and its equipment.

Drunk Driving

Drinking and driving is dangerous. Drunk driving is the number one contributor to the highway death toll each year. Alcohol impairs a driver's judgment, vision and muscular coordination. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect a driver's reflexes, perceptions and judgment.

Please don't drink and drive, or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Choose a designated driver if you're with a group, or if you're alone, call a cab.

Drugs and Driving

Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous or more dangerous than driving drunk, depending on the drug used and the quantity consumed. Don't take drugs and drive.

DRIVING TIPS

SUGGESTIONS FOR ECO-NOMICAL OPERATION

Your vehicle's fuel economy depends mainly on your style of driving, where you drive and when you drive.

Each of these factors affects how many kilometers (miles) you can get from a liter (gallon) of fuel. To operate your vehicle as economically as possible, use the following driving suggestions to help save money in both fuel and repairs:

  • Avoid lengthy warm-up idling. Once the engine is running smoothly, begin driving. Remember, engine warm-up may take a little longer on cold days.
  • Save fuel by accelerating slowly after stopping.
  • Keep the engine in tune and follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule. This will increase the life of all parts and lower your operating costs.

  • Do not use the air conditioner unnecessarily.

  • Slow down when driving on rough roads.
  • For longer tyre life and better fuel economy, always keep the tyres inflated to the recommended pressures.
  • Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles to avoid sudden stops. This will reduce wear on brake linings and pads. Driving in such a way will also save fuel because extra fuel is required to accelerate back to driving speed.
  • Do not carry unnecessary weight in the vehicle.
  • Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This can cause needless wear, possible damage to the brakes, and poor fuel economy.
  • Improper wheel alignment results in faster tyre wear and lower fuel economy.

  • Open windows at high speeds can reduce fuel economy.

  • Fuel economy is less in crosswinds and headwinds. To help offset some of this loss, slow down when driving in these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating condition is important both for economy and safety. Therefore, have an authorized Kia dealer perform scheduled inspections and maintenance.

WARNING - Engine off Motion Never turn the engine off to coast down hills or anytime the vehicle is in motion. The power steering and power brakes will not function without the engine running. Instead, downshift to an appropriate gear for engine braking effect.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

Hazardous Driving Conditions

When hazardous driving conditions are encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow these suggestions:

  • Drive cautiously and allow extra distance for braking.
  • Avoid sudden movements in braking or steering.
  • When braking, pump the brake pedal with a light up-and-down motion until the vehicle is stopped.
  • If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use second gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid spinning the drive wheels.
  • Use sand, rock salt, tyre chains, or other non-slip material under the drive wheels to provide traction when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.

WARNING - Downshifting

Downshifting into 1(First) gear with a manual transmission, or L (Low) with an automatic transmission, while driving on slippery surfaces can cause an accident. The sudden change in tyre speed could cause the tyres to skid. Be careful when downshifting on slippery surfaces.

Rocking the Vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between 1 (First) and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped with a manual transmission or R (Reverse) and any forward gear in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission. Do not race the engine, and spin the wheels as little as possible. If you are still stuck after a few tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating and possible damage to the transmission, transfer case, or differential.

DRIVING TIPS

\*NOTICE

Prolonged rocking may cause engine over-heating, transmission or transfer case damage or failure, and tyre damage.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \*NOTICE - 1

WARNING - Spinning Tyres

Do not spin the wheels, especially at speeds more than 56 km/h (35 mph). Spinning the wheels at high speeds when the vehicle is stationary could cause a tyre to overheat, explode and injure bystanders.

Driving at Night

Because night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight, here are some important tips to remember:

  • Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.
  • Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver's headlights.
  • Keep your headlights clean and properly aimed. Dirty or improperly aimed headlights will make it much more difficult to see at night.
  • Avoid staring directly at the headlights of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the Rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous, especially if you're not prepared for the slick pavement. Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain:

  • A heavy rainfall will make it harder to see and will increase the distance needed to stop your vehicle, so slow down.
  • Keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Replace your windshield wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield.
  • If your tyres are not in good condition, making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident. Be sure your tyres are in good shape.
  • Turn on your headlights to make it easier for others to see you.

  • Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly.

  • If you believe you may have gotten your brakes wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking operation returns.

Winter Driving

  • We recommend that you carry emergency equipment, including tyre chains, a window scraper, windshield de-icer, a bag of sand or salt, flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.
  • Make sure you have sufficient ethylene-glycol coolant in the radiator.
  • Check the battery condition and cables. Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of any battery, so it must be in excellent condition to provide enough winter starting power.
  • Make sure the engine oil viscosity is suitable for cold weather.
  • Check the ignition system for loose connections and damage.

  • Use antifreeze-formulated windshield washer fluid. (Do not use engine coolant antifreeze.)

  • Do not use the parking brake if it might freeze. When parking, shift to P (Park) with an automatic transmission, or to 1 (First) or R (Reverse) with a manual transmission and block the rear wheels.

DRIVING TIPS

Snow tyres

If you mount snow tyres on your Kia, make sure they are radial tyres of the same size and load range as the original tyres. Mount snow tyres on all four wheels to balance your vehicle's handling in all weather conditions. Keep in mind that the traction provided by snow tyres on dry roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tyres. You should drive cautiously even when the roads are clear. Check with the tyre dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Snow tyres - 1

WARNING - Snow Tyre Size

Snow tyres should be equivalent in size and type to the vehicle's standard tyres. Otherwise, the safety and handling of your vehicle may be adversely affected.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - Snow Tyre Size - 1

natural_image Close-up of a car wheel rim with visible tire structure (no text or symbols)

Tyre chains

Since the sidewalls of radial tyres are thinner, they can be damaged by mounting some types of snow chains on them. Therefore, the use of snow tyres is recommended instead of snow chains. Do not mount tyre chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels, snow chains may cause damage to the wheels. If snow chains must be used, use wire-type chains with a thickness of less than 15 mm. Damage to your vehicle caused by improper snow chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturers warranty.

When using tire chains, attach them to the drive wheels as follows.

2WD : Rear wheels

4WD : All four wheels In some unavoidable circumstances, install them on only the rear wheels, not the front wheels.

CAUTION

  • Make sure the snow chains are the correct size and type for your tyres. Incorrect snow chains can cause damage to the vehicle body and suspension and may not be covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty. Also, the snow chain connecting hooks may be damaged from contacting vehicle components causing the snow chains to come loose from the tyre. Make sure the snow chains are SAE class "S" certified. Cable-type, or plastic-type snow chain can also be used.
    • Always check chain installation for proper mounting after driving approximately 0.5 to 1 km to ensure safe mounting. Retighten or remount the chains if they are loose.

Chain installation

When installing chains, follow the manufacturer's instructions and mount them as tightly as you can. Drive slowly with chains installed. If you hear the chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and tighten them. If they still make contact, slow down until it stops. Remove the chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

WARNING

When mounting snow chains, park the vehicle on level ground away from traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard Warning flashers and place a triangular emergency warning device behind the vehicle if available. Always place the vehicle in park (P), apply the parking brake and turn off the engine before installing snow chains.

WARNING - Tyre Chains

• The use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.
- Do not exceed 30 km/h (20 mph) or the chain manufacturer's recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.
- Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, sharp turns, and other road hazards, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.
- Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel braking.
- Chains that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.
- Stop driving and retighten the chains any time you hear them hitting the vehicle.

DRIVING TIPS

Driving in Flooded Areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub. Drive through any water slowly. Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be affected.

After driving through water, dry the brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving slowly.

On-Pavement Driving Tips

This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is defined as a utility vehicle. Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, which allows you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two-wheel drive vehicles, any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform better in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.

WARNING - Rollover

As with other Sports Utility Vehicle (SUV), failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an accident or vehicle rollover.

  • Specific design characteristics (higher ground clearance, narrower track, etc.) give this vehicle a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars.
  • A SUV is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles.
  • Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
  • In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt. Make sure everyone in the vehicle is properly buckled up.

USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE

Driving on Snow- or Ice-Covered Roads ("4HI, 4LO" for Part-time 4WD Operation or "AUTO" for Full-time 4WD Operation)

  • Use snow tyres or tyre chains. See "Tyres" and "Tyre Chains" in this section for more information.
  • Keep an adequate distance between yourself and other vehicles.
  • Avoid sudden braking, acceleration or steering. These actions can cause your vehicle to lose traction.

Driving in Sand or Mud ("4HI, 4LO" for Part-time 4WD Operation or "AUTO" for Full-time 4WD Operation)

  • Avoid sudden braking, acceleration or steering. These actions can cause your vehicle to get stuck in the sand or mud.
  • Drive at low speeds whenever possible.
  • When using tire chains, attach them to all four wheels. In some unavoidable circumstances, install them on only the rear wheels, not the front wheels.
  • You may need to get out of your vehicle at times to check road conditions.
  • If you get stuck in the sand or mud, try placing stones, wood or other similar materials under the tyres to get traction, or move forward and backward repeatedly to get unstuck.

WARNING - Traction

Make sure that no one stands in front of or behind the tyres when materials are placed under the tyres to get more traction. The tyres may cause loose materials to fly out from under the vehicle, potentially causing serious bodily injury or death.

\* NOTICE

Prolonged rocking may cause engine damage, overheating, transmission differential or transfer case damage or failure and tyre damage.

DRIVING TIPS

Driving on a Hill ("4LO" for Part-time 4WD Operation or "LOW" for Full-time 4WD operation)

  • Use low gear when going uphill or downhill and avoid sudden braking.
  • Do not shift gears or use your clutch when going downhill. Do not coast downhill in Neutral.

Crossing a Ditch ("4LO" for Part-time 4WD Operation or "LOW" for Full-time 4WD operation)

  • Avoid driving through ditches if possible, especially if there is water in the ditch. Your vehicle may stall if the electrical system gets wet. If you must cross a ditch, shift the transfer knob to 4LO or LOW.
  • Avoid driving where the water level is higher than the bottom of the wheel hub. If the water level rises above this mark, your vehicle will need to be serviced.
  • Tap lightly on the brake pedal during and after driving through water. This will help keep the brakes dry and in proper working order.
  • Do not shift gears while crossing a ditch.

Tight Corner Brake Effect

CAUTION

When turning sharply on a paved road at low speed while in four-wheel drive, steering control will be difficult.

This is called tight corner brake effect. Tight corner brake effect is a unique characteristic of four-wheel drive vehicles caused by the difference in tyre rotation at the four wheels and the zero-degree alignment of the front wheels and suspension.

Sharp turns at low speeds should be carried out with caution.

Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel Drive Vehicle

Off-road driving can be great fun. But it has definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself.

"Off-roading" means you've left the paved road system behind. Traffic lanes are not marked. Curves are not banked.

There are no carefully engineered road signs to warn you of dangerous conditions or to advise you of a safe speed. You have to assess the environment yourself. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill.

Off-road driving involves learning new skills. That's why it's important that you read and understand this section. You'll find useful driving information and suggestions. These will help make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.

Before you go off-roading

There are some things to do before you leave the paved roads. Be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done beforehand. Be sure to read all the information about your four-wheel drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tyre fully inflated? Are the fluid levels at the proper levels? What are the local laws that apply to off-roading where you'll be driving? If you don't know, you should check with law enforcement people in the area. Will you be on someone's private land? If so, be sure to get the necessary permission.

Loading your vehicle for off-road driving

There are some important items to remember about how to properly load your vehicle.

- The heaviest things should be in the cargo area and forward of your rear axle. Place heavier items as far forward as you can.

- Be sure the load is properly secured, so driving over off-road terrain doesn't shift your load or throw items toward the driver or passengers.

DRIVING TIPS

WARNING - Cargo

- Cargo piled close to the height of (or higher than) the seat backs can be thrown forward during a sudden stop or on downhill slopes. You or your passengers could be severely injured. Keep cargo below the top of the seat backs and, if possible, do not pile separate items.

- Unsecured cargo in the cargo area can be tossed about when driving on the highways or over rough terrain. You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects and severely injured. Secure the cargo properly.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- Cargo should not be carried on the roof without a proper roof rack installed. The roof rack will hold a maximum of 75 kg (165 lbs.) - Europe, 45kg (100 lbs.) - Except Europe. Heavy loads in a roof rack raise the vehicle's center of gravity, making it more likely to roll over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over. Do not load cargo on the roof while driving off-road, if at all possible. Put heavy loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof or in a roof rack. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible.

Traveling to remote areas

It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route. You are much less likely to encounter unwanted surprises. Get accurate maps of trails.

It's also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other can quickly help.

Getting familiar with off-road driving

It's necessary for you to practice in an area that's safe and close to home before you begin serious off-road driving. Off-road driving requires new and different driving skills.

You need to tune your senses to different kinds of signals. For example, constantly sweep the terrain with your eyes looking for unexpected obstacles. Listen for unusual tyre, gear, or engine sounds. Feel and respond to the vibrations of the vehicle with your hands, feet, and body while still carefully controlling your vehicle. You'll also need to adjust your expectations and greatly lower the number of miles you expect to cover in an hour or a day.

Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep in mind when traveling at higher speeds:

  • You approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles.
  • You have less time to react.
  • You have much more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles, giving you less vehicle control.
  • You'll need more distance for braking, especially since you're on an unpaved surface. Such terrain will always be more "slippery" than a paved road.

WARNING - Off Road Driving When you're driving off-road, bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and crash. So, whether you are driving on or off the road, you and your passengers should always wear safety belts.

DRIVING TIPS

Scanning the terrain

Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features. Here are some things to consider.

Surface conditions

Off-roading can take you over hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering, acceleration, and braking of your vehicle in different ways.

Depending upon the kind of surface you are on, you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer braking distances.

Surface obstacles

Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle you if you're not prepared. Often these obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some things to constantly evaluate:

• Is the path ahead clear?
- Will the surface texture change ahead?
- Does the path take you uphill or downhill?
- Might you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly?

When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, it is critical that you keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other surface features can force the wheel out of your hands if you're not prepared.

When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even with one or two wheels, you can't control the vehicle as well or perhaps at all. Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it's especially important to avoid sudden acceleration, sudden turns, or sudden braking. Any of these actions could cause the center of gravity of the vehicle to shift and destabilize the vehicle, leading to a collision or rollover accident. Off-road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways. There are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. You have to use your own judgment about what is safe and what isn't. Bad judgment in this uncontrolled environment can be fatal.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Surface obstacles - 1

WARNING - Drinking & Driving

Drinking and driving, or drug use and driving can be very dangerous on any road. This certainly remains true for off-road driving. At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgement can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol or drugs. You could have a serious - or even fatal - accident if you drink or take drugs and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking or taking drugs.

Driving on Off-Road Hills

Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a hill. Driving safely on hills requires excellent judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can't do. There are some hills that simply should not be driven.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Driving on Off-Road Hills - 1

WARNING - Driving on Hills

Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle. If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive down them, you can't control your speed. In either case, you could flip over. If you drive across them, you will roll over. You could be seriously or fatally injured. If you have any doubt about the steepness, don't drive up or down the hill, even if it means that you have to turn around and find another route. Re-tracking is a normal part of safe off-roading.

DRIVING TIPS

Approaching a hill

When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it's one of those hills that's just too steep to climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be difficult to judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.

Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill:

  • Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply steeper in places?
  • Is there good traction on the hill-side, or will the surface cause tyre slipping?
  • Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you won't have to make turning maneuvers?
  • Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
  • What's beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an embankment, a drop-off, or a fence? Get out of the vehicle and walk the hill if you are unsure. It's the smart way to find out.

  • Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
    • How have weather conditions affected the terrain? Is there likely to be mud, snow or ice on the hill?

  • What time of day is it? Are temperatures dropping so that wet surfaces will start to freeze?

Driving uphill

Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you need to take some special steps.

  • Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel.
  • Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed. Don't use more power than you need, because you don't want your wheels to start spinning or sliding.
  • Try to drive straight up the hill, if at all possible. If the path twists and turns, you may have to find another route.

⚠ WARNING - Driving Across Hills

Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous. You could lose traction, slide sideways, or just reach an area too steep to traverse. In any case, it could cause you to roll over. You could be seriously or fatally injured. When driving up hills, always try to go as straight up as possible.

  • Slow down as you approach the top of the hill.
  • Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
  • Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you're there.
  • Use your headlights even during the day. They make you more visible to other drivers.

WARNING - Driving over Hills Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can cause an accident and result in serious or fatal injury. There could be a drop-off, embankment, cliff, another vehicle or people sitting on the ground. As you near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.

DRIVING TIPS

Stalling while driving uphill

What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and I can't make it up the hill?

If your vehicle stalls, or is about to stall while driving uphill, there are some things you should do, and there are some things you must not do. First, here's what you should do:

  • Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake.
  • If your engine is still running, shift the transmission into reverse, release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill in reverse.

  • If your engine has stopped running, you'll need to restart it. With the brake pedal depressed and the parking brake still applied, shift a manual transmission to N (Neutral), or an automatic transmission to P (Park) and restart the engine. Then, shift to reverse, release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill in reverse.
    As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position. This way, you'll be able to tell if your wheels are straight or turned to the left or right as you back down.

Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or are about to stall, when going up a hill.

- Never attempt to prevent a stall by depressing the clutch or shifting to N (Neutral) to "rev-up" the engine and regain forward momentum. This won't work. Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control or roll over.

Instead, apply the brake to stop the vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift into reverse, release the parking brake, and slowly back down.

CAUTION

Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle, it's steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you can't make it up, you must back down the hill.

Stalled on a steep uphill

If your vehicle stalls and you can't back down the hill, try this: Set the parking brake, put your transmission in 1 (First) gear or P (Park), and turn the engine off. Leave the vehicle and get some help. If your vehicle is at an angle to the slope of the hill, exit the vehicle on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Leave it in 1 (First) gear for manual transmission or P (Park) for automatic transmission.

WARNING - Exiting Vehicle

Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or fatally injured. Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.

DRIVING TIPS

KIA Sorento (2005) - DRIVING TIPS - 1

WARNING - Leaving Vehicle

If you are going to leave your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift a manual transmission to 1(First), or an automatic transmission to P (Park).

Driving downhill

When off-roading takes you downhill, you'll want to consider many of the same things you thought about before you went uphill. As a brief reminder, those include:

• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain vehicle control?
- What's the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
- Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs? Boulders?
- What's at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
- Have changes in the weather conditions and their effect on the terrain since you went uphill made your task more difficult?

Once you have decided that you can go down a hill safely, try to keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a low gear. This way, engine braking can help your brakes so they won't have to do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.

CAUTION

Before beginning to go downhill, it is critical that you ensure that no cargo can shift forward while you are heading downhill. Such shifting could either endanger you and your occupants, or interfere with your ability to control the vehicle.

WARNING - Braking

Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause loss of control and a serious accident. Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control.

Avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill. A hill that's not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across. You could roll over if you don't drive straight down.

Never go downhill with the clutch pedal depressed. This is called "free-wheeling." Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade.

CAUTION

Avoid braking so hard that you lock the wheels when going downhill. If your front wheels are locked, you can't steer your vehicle.

If your wheels lock up during downhill braking, you may feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways. To regain your direction, just ease off the brakes and steer to keep the front of the vehicle pointing straight downhill.

DRIVING TIPS

Stalling downhill

Stalling is much more likely to happen going uphill. But if it happens going downhill, here's what to do.

  • Stop your vehicle by applying the brakes. Then apply the parking brake.
  • Move the shift lever to P (Park) in automatic transmissions or shift to N (Neutral) in manual transmissions and, while still braking, restart the engine.
  • Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake, and drive straight down.
  • If the engine won't start, get out and seek help. Exit on the uphill side of the vehicle and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill.

Driving across an incline

Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide whether or not to try to drive across the incline. Here are some things to consider:

- A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across. When you go straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels) reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end. But when you drive across an incline, the much narrower track width (the distance between the left and right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover.

  • Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause your tyres to slip sideways. If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that will tip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and cause it to roll over.
  • Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully whether or not to try to drive across an incline. Just because the trail goes across the incline doesn't mean you have to drive it.

WARNING - Roll Over

Driving across an incline that's too steep will make your vehicle roll over. You could be seriously or fatally injured. If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline, don't drive across it. Find another route instead.

If your vehicle slides downhill

If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn downhill immediately. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a much better way to prevent this is to get out and "walk the course" first so you know what the surface is like before you drive it.

Stalling while crossing an incline

If your vehicle stalls when you're crossing an incline, be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill side, even if that door is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over, you'll be in its path.

If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over.

DRIVING TIPS

KIA Sorento (2005) - DRIVING TIPS - 1

WARNING - Exiting Vehicle

Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or fatally injured. Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice

When you drive in mud, sand, snow, or ice, your wheels won't get good traction. You can't accelerate as quickly, turning is more difficult, and you'll need longer braking distances.

It's best to use a low gear when you're in mud, the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In extremely deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don't get stuck.

When you drive on sand, you'll sense a change in wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand dunes) your tyres will tend to sink into the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating, and braking. You may want to reduce the air pressure in your tyres slightly when driving on sand. This will improve traction. Remember to re-inflate them the first chance that you have after you leave the loosely packed sand.

\* NOTICE

- In case of loss of traction in mud, loose soil, or sand, turn the steering wheel rapidly from side-to-side. This can help generate additional traction.

- Do not gun the engine. This will cause the tyres to spin and dig down, not forward, and could bury the vehicle to the frame. Smooth, easy power is better than too much power.

Hard-packed snow and ice offer the worst tyre traction. On these surfaces, it's very easy to lose control. On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will even have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving, poor steering and difficult braking can easily cause you to slide out of control.

WARNING - Frozen Surfaces Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only.

Driving in Water

Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems. However, heavy rain can cause flash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution.

Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it. If it's deep enough to cover your wheel bearing hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, don't try it, You probably won't get through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts.

If the water isn't too deep, then drive through slowly. At fast speeds, water can splash on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if your tailpipe goes underwater. As long as your tailpipe is underwater, you will not be able to start your engine. When you go through water, remember that it may take you longer to stop when your brakes are wet.

If you have driven through water that was deep enough to cover your wheel bearing hubs, it may be a good idea to have an Authorized Kia dealer or other competent service center repack your front wheel bearings and examine your rear-end fluid for evidence of water.

DRIVING TIPS

KIA Sorento (2005) - DRIVING TIPS - 1

WARNING - Water

Driving through rushing water can be dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown. If it's only inches deep, it can still wash away the ground from under your tyres, and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle. Never drive through rushing water.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody, chassis or under the hood. These accumulations can be a fire hazard.

After driving in mud or sand, clean and check the brake linings. Accumulation of mud or sand can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure, steering, suspension, wheels, tyres, and exhaust system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage. Your vehicle will also require more frequent service due to off-road use.

TRAILER TOWING

(FOR EUROPE AND

AUSTRALIA ONLY)

WARNING - Towing a Trailer If you don't use the correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well - or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously or fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section.

\*NOTICE

Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this section.

Item\EngineDiesel EngineGasoline Engine
2.4 Engine 3.5 Engine
EuropeAustraliaEuropeAustraliaEuropeAustralia
Maximum trailer weight kg (lbs.)Without brake System kg (lbs.)750(1650)750(1650)750(1650)650(1430)750(1650)750(1650)
With brake System kg (lbs.)2800(6160)2300(5070)2300(5060)1600(3520)2800(6160)2300(5070)
Maximum permissible static vertical load on the coupling device kg (lbs.)112(247)92(203)92(203)64(142)112(247)92(203)
Recommended distance from rear wheel center to coupling point mm (Inch)1108(44)1108(44)1108(44)1108(44)1108(44)1108(44)

DRIVING TIPS

KIA Sorento (2005) - DRIVING TIPS - 1

text_image 2-M12 WNUT FRAME OUTER 100 25.68 25 170 130 2-M12 WNUT FRAME INNER 2BLC501

Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify what the vehicle trailing capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in "Weight of the Trailer" that appears later in this section. Remember that trailing is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailing takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.

This section contains many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. Please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine, transmission, wheel assemblies, and tyres are forced to work harder against the load of the added weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads. This additional burden generates extra heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.

If You do decide to Pull a Trailer

Here are some important points if you decide to pull a trailer:

  • Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch dealer about sway control.
  • After your odometer indicates 800 km (500 miles) or more, you can tow a trailer. For the first 800 km (500 miles) that you tow a trailer, don't drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and don't make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle "wear" in at the heavier loads.
    • Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than 100 km/h (60 mph)).
  • The important considerations have to do with weight:

Weight of the trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be? It should never weigh more than specifications on page 5-33. But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. The ideal trailer weight can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

DRIVING TIPS

Weight of the trailer tongue

The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross vehicle weight (GVW) of your vehicle. This weight includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will also be carrying that weight.

The trailer tongue should weigh a maximum of 10% of the total loaded trailer weight. After you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren't, you may be able to correct them simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

CAUTION

- Never load a trailer with more weight in the rear than in the front. The front should be loaded with approximately 60% of the total trailer load; the rear should be loaded with approximately 40% of the total trailer load.

- Never exceed the maximum weight limits of the trailer or trailer towing equipment. Improper loading can result in damage to your vehicle and/or personal injury. Check weights and loading at a commercial scale or highway patrol office equipped with scales.

Hitches

It's important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads are a few reasons why you'll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

- Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch.

If you don't seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and water.

- The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper.

Safety chains

You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.

Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer's recommendation for attaching safety chains. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your trailer. And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer weighs more than 750 kg (1650 lbs.) (but, 2.4 Gasoline Engine for Australia: 650 kg / 1430 lbs) loaded, then it needs its own brakes and they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you'll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.

- Don't tap into your vehicle's brake system.

CAUTION

Do not use a trailer with its own brakes unless you are absolutely certain that you have properly set up the brake system. This is not a task for amateurs. Use an experienced, competent trailer shop for this work.

Driving with a trailer

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you must get to know your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly so responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform, safety chains, electrical connector(s), lights, tyres and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.

DRIVING TIPS

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lights and any trailer brakes are still working.

Following distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing

You'll need more passing distance up ahead when you're towing a trailer. And, because you're a good deal longer, you'll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move your hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.

Making turns

When you're turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won't strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn signals when towing a trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have a different turn signal flasher and extra wiring. The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly connected, the trailer lights will also flash to alert other drivers you're about to turn, change lanes, or stop.

When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signals when, in fact, they are not. It's important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. You must also check the lights every time you disconnect and then reconnect the wires.

Do not connect a trailer lighting system directly to your vehicle's lighting system. Use only an approved trailer wiring harness.

Your Authorized Kia Dealer can assist you in installing the wiring harness.

CAUTION

Failure to use an approved trailer wiring harness could result in damage to the vehicle electrical system and/or personal injury.

Driving on grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don't shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer operate efficiently.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to around 70 km/h (45 mph) to reduce the possibility of engine and transmission overheating.

If your trailer weighs more than 750kg (1650 lbs.) (but, 2.4 Gasolina Engine for Australia: 650kg / 1430lbs ) and you have an automatic transmission, you should drive in D (Drive) when towing a trailer.

DRIVING TIPS

Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when towing a trailer will minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your transmission. If you have a manual transmission, drive in fourth gear (or, as you need to, a lower gear).

Parking on hills

Generally, you should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. People can be seriously or fatally injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged if they begin a downhill trajectory.

WARNING - Parking on a Hill Parking your vehicle on a hill with a trailer attached could cause serious injury or death, should a down hill trajectory happen.

However, if you ever have to park your trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:

  1. Apply your brakes, but don't shift into gear.
  2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
  3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
  4. Reapply the brakes. Apply your parking brake, and then shift to R (Reverse) for a manual transmission or P (Park) for an automatic transmission.
  5. Release the brakes.

WARNING - Parking Brake

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the parking brake is not firmly set.

If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be seriously or fatally injured.

When you are ready to leave after parking on a hill

  1. With the manual transmission in N (Neutral) or automatic transmission in P (Park), apply your brakes and hold the brake pedal down while you:

- Start your engine;

- Shift into gear; and

- Release the parking brake.

  1. Slowly remove your foot from the brake pedal.

  2. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

  3. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing

Your vehicle will need service more often when you regularly pull a trailer. Important items to pay particular attention include engine oil, automatic transmission fluid, axle lubricant and cooling system fluid. Brake condition is another important item to frequently check. Each item is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you're trailering, it's a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip.

Don't forget to also maintain your trailer and hitch. Follow the maintenance schedule that accompanied your trailer and check it periodically. Preferably, conduct the check at the start of each day's driving. Most importantly, all hitch nuts and bolts should be tight.

DRIVING TIPS

\*NOTICE

Due to higher load during trailer usage, overheating might occur in hot days or during uphill driving. If the coolant gauge indicates over-heating, switch off the A/C and stop the vehicle in a safe area to cool down the engine.

OVERLOADING

CAUTION

The gross axle weight rating (GAWR) and the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle are on the manufacturer's label attached to the driver's door. Exceeding these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle damage. You can calculate the weight of your load by weighing the items (or people) before putting them in the vehicle. Be careful not to overload your vehicle.

LOADING YOUR VEHICLE
KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

The Certification/Tyre label is found on the front edge of the RH "B" pillar. The label shows the size of your original tyres and inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle.

This is called the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. The Certification/Tyre label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR).

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.

CAUTION

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, change to the vehicle may occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

\*NOTICE

Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
KIA Sorento (2005) - \*NOTICE - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a SUV with a visible wheel and gear shift, no text or symbols present

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

Road Warning 6-2

Overheating 6-3

Emergency Starting 6-4

Electrical Circuit Protection 6-7

Towing 6-14

If You Have a Flat Tyre 6-20

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

ROAD WARNING

KIA Sorento (2005) - ROAD WARNING - 1

text_image 0:00 M M F A H L O C AC 2BLC601A

Hazard Warning Flasher

The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle. It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.

Depress the flasher switch with the ignition switch in any position. The flasher switch is located in the center console switch panel. All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.

  • The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.
  • The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on.
  • Care must be taken when using the hazard warning flasher while the vehicle is being towed.

OVERHEATING

If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine has probably overheated. Should any of these symptoms occur, use the following procedure:

  1. Turn on the hazard warning flasher, then drive to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle; set the automatic transmission in P (Park), or shift the manual transmission to N (Neutral) and apply the parking brake.
  2. Make sure the air conditioner is off.
  3. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the radiator, stop the engine and call an Authorized Kia Dealer for assistance.

If coolant is not boiling out, allow the engine to idle and open the hood to permit the engine to cool gradually.

If the temperature does not go down with the engine idling, stop the engine and allow sufficient time for it to cool.

  1. The coolant level should then be checked. If the level in the reservoir is low, look for leaks at the radiator hoses and connections, heater hoses and connections, radiator, and water pump. If you find a major leak or another problem that may have caused the engine to overheat, do not operate the engine until it has been corrected. Call an Authorized Kia Dealer for assistance. If you do not find a leak or other problem, carefully add coolant to the reservoir.

WARNING - Removing Coolant Reservoir Cap

Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure. This could cause serious injury.

If the engine frequently overheats, have the cooling system checked and repaired by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

EMERGENCY STARTING

Jump Starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery, follow the jump starting procedures on this page. If in doubt, we strongly recommend that you have a competent technician or towing service jump start your vehicle

\* NOTICE

Use only a 12-volt jumper system. You can damage a 12-volt starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts beyond repair by use of a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery

  • Keep all flames or sparks away from the battery. The battery produces hydrogen gas which may explode if exposed to flame or sparks.
  • Do not attempt to jump start the vehicle if the discharged battery is frozen or if the electrolyte level is low; the battery may rupture or explode.

Jump starting procedure

  1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-volt and that its negative terminal is grounded.
  2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to touch.

Connecting jumper cables
KIA Sorento (2005) - Jump starting procedure - 1

text_image Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order. ① (+) ② (+) ③ (-) ④ (-) Jumper Cables Boosler battery Discharged battery RBLA616

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

  1. Turn off all unnecessary electrical loads.
  2. Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the previous illustration. First connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery, then connect the other end to the positive terminal on the booster battery. Proceed to connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery, then the other end to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for example, the engine lifting bracket) away from the battery. Do not connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked. Do not connect the jumper cable from the negative terminal of the booster battery to the negative terminal of the discharged battery.

Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.

  1. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and let it run at 2,000 rpm, then start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, you should have your vehicle checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

Push-Starting

Vehicles equipped with automatic transmission cannot be push-started.

A vehicle equipped with a manual transmission should not be push-started because it could damage the emission control system.

Follow the directions in this section for jump-starting.

CAUTION

Never tow a vehicle to start it because the sudden surge forward when the engine starts could cause a collision with the tow vehicle.

ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION

KIA Sorento (2005) - ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION - 1

text_image Standard Normal Blown Main fuse Normal Blown AS2B06003

Fuses

A vehicle's electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.

This vehicle has two fuse panels, one located in the driver's side kick panel, the other in the engine compartment near the battery.

If any of your vehicle's lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will be melted.

Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows out, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and immediately consult an Authorized Kia Dealer.

Two kinds of fuses are used: standard for lower amperage rating and main for higher amperage ratings.

Fuse Replacement

KIA Sorento (2005) - Fuse Replacement - 1

WARNING - Fuse

Replacement

  • Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the same rating.
  • A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and possibly a fire.
  • Never install a wire instead of the proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and possibly a fire.
  • Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system.

If the electrical system does not work, first check the driver's side fuse panel.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Replacement - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols
  1. Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off.
  2. Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the removal tool provided on the main fuse box in the engine compartment.
  3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown.

Spare fuses are provided in the fuse panel.

  1. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
    If it fits loosely, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer.
    If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the radio or room lamp fuse.
    If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse block in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Replacement - 2

text_image Fuse Box (Diesel Engine Only) Fuse Box 2BLA605 2
  1. Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off.
  2. Remove the fuse box cover by unhooking the tab on one end and tilting the cover back toward the other end.
  3. Check the fuses. If one is blown, replace it with a new one of the same rating.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Replacement - 3

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

If the 120A "MAIN" fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows:

  1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
  2. Remove the screws in the photo above.
  3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same 120A rating.
  4. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

Fuse panel description

Inside the fuse box covers, you can find the fuse label describing fuse name and capacity.

Engine compartment (Diesel engine)
KIA Sorento (2005) - Fuse panel description - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["GLOW 1 60A"] --> B["LEAV"]
    C["GLOW 2 60A"] --> D["RELAY"]
    E["WATR 1 30A"] --> F["RELAY"]
    G["WATR 2 30A"] --> H["RELAY"]
    I["GLOW 2 RELAY"] --> J["RELAY"]
    K["Input: GLOW 1 RELEV"] --> L["REF: 1"]
    M["Input: WATR 2 RELAY"] --> N["RELAY"]
    O["Input: WATR 2 RELAY"] --> P["RELAY"]
    Q["Input: GLOW 2 RELAY"] --> R["RELAY"]
    S["Input: GLOW 2 RELAY"] --> T["RELAY"]
    U["Input: GLOW 2 RELAY"] --> V["RELAY"]
    W["Input: GLOW 2 RELAY"] --> X["RELAY"]
    Y["Input: GLOW 2 RELAY"] --> Z["RELAY"]

KIA Sorento (2005) - Fuse panel description - 2

text_image MAIN 120A LEMONS ALLWIDE BUTTER METHI POTATO MAIN RELAY ALLWIDE BUTTER METHI POTATO MAIN (POCK) RELAY ALLWIDE BUTTER MAIN (POCK) RELAY ALLWIDE BUTTER MAIN (POCK) RELAY ALLWIDE BUTTER MAIN (POCK) RELAY ALLWIDE BUTTER MAIN (POCK) RELAY ALLWIDE BUTTER MAIN (POCK) RELAY ALLWIDE BUTTER MAIN (POCK) RELAY ALLWIDE BURGER MAIN (POCK) RELAY ALLWIDE BURGER MAIN (POCK) RELAY ALLWIDE BURGER MAIN (POCK) RELAY ALLWIDE BURGER MAIN (POCK) RELAY ALLWIDE BURGER MAIN (POCK) RELAY ALLWIDE BURGER MAIN (POCK) RELAY ALLWIDE BURGER MAIN (POLK) RELAY ALLWIDE BURGER MAIN (POLK) RELAY ALLWIDE BURGER MAIN (POLK) RELAY ALLWIDE BURGER MAIN (POLK) RELAY ALLWIDE BURGER MAIN (POLK) RELAY ALLWIDE

Engine compartment (Gasoline engine)
KIA Sorento (2005) - Fuse panel description - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["MAIN 120A"] --> B["START FELAY"]
    B --> C["MAIN FELAY"]
    C --> D["MAIN FELAY"]
    D --> E["MAIN FELAY"]
    E --> F["MAIN FELAY"]
    F --> G["MAIN FELAY"]
    G --> H["MAIN FELAY"]
    H --> I["MAIN FELAY"]
    I --> J["MAIN FELAY"]
    J --> K["MAIN FELAY"]
    K --> L["MAIN FELAY"]
    L --> M["MAIN FELAY"]
    M --> N["MAIN FELAY"]
    N --> O["MAIN FELAY"]
    O --> P["MAIN FELAY"]
    P --> Q["MAIN FELAY"]
    Q --> R["MAIN FELAY"]
    R --> S["MAIN FELAY"]
    S --> T["MAIN FELAY"]
    T --> U["MAIN FELAY"]
    U --> V["MAIN FELAY"]
    V --> W["MAIN FELAY"]
    W --> X["MAIN FELAY"]
    X --> Y["MAIN FELAY"]
    Y --> Z["MAIN FELAY"]
    Z --> AA["MAIN FELAY"]
    AA --> AB["MAIN FELAY"]
    AB --> AC["MAIN FELAY"]
    AC --> AD["MAIN FELAY"]
    AD --> AE["MAIN FELAY"]
    AE --> AF["MAIN FELAY"]
    AF --> AG["MAIN FELAY"]
    AG --> AH["MAIN FELAY"]
    AH --> AI["MAIN FELAY"]
    AI --> AJ["MAIN FELAY"]
    AJ --> AK["MAIN FELAY"]
    AK --> AL["MAIN FELAY"]
    AL --> AM["MAIN FELAY"]
    AM --> AN["MAIN FELAY"]
    AN --> AO["MAIN FELAY"]
    AO --> AP["MAIN FELAY"]
    AP --> AQ["MAIN FELAY"]
    AQ --> AR["MAIN FELAY"]
    AR --> AS["MAIN FELAY"]
    AS --> AT["MAIN FELAY"]
    AT --> AU["MAIN FELAY"]
    AU --> AV["MAIN FELAY"]
    AV --> AW["MAIN FELAY"]
    AW --> AX["MAIN FELAY"]
    AX --> AY["MAIN FELAY"]

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

Description FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT
FUEL15AFuel pump relay
F/HEATER30AFuel filter heating system
HORN15AHorn relay
HEAD (HI)15AHead light, Cluster
HEAD (LO) 15AHead light
(H/BURN) *20AFuel fired heater
(H/LP WASH)20AHead lamp washer
ECU10AEngine control unit
O2 (DN)15ARear O2 sensor
O2 (UP)15AFront O2 sensor
P/TRN10AMain relay, Alternator
P/W (LH)25APower window switch (LH)
P/W (RH)25APower window switch (RH)
DEF25ADefroster relay
MAIN120AAlternator
IGN140AIgnition switch
IGN230AStarter relay, Ignition switch
(ABS) 40AABS Control unit
F/BLW30AFront blower relay
(F/FOG)15AFront fog light relay
GLOW 1 *60AGlow plug
GLOW 2 *60AGlow plug
W/HTR 1 *30AWater heater 1
W/HTR 2 *30AWater heater 2
W/HTR 3 *30AWater heater 3
F/HEATER30AFuel filter heating system
INJECTOR 15A Engine control unit,EGR solenoid valve (if equipped), Glow relay*, Water heater relay *
BTN1 40A ROOM 10A fuse, TCCS20A fuse, STOP 15A fuse, Power outlet
BTN2 20ARear fog lamp. Power seat, seat water
BTN3 40A W/SHD 15A, D/Lock, Hazard 15A, S/Roof 20A, OBD-II 10A, Seat (Driver) fuse
CD/FAN (C/FAN2) 30A Air-conditionerrelay, Cooling fan relay (HI)
MEMORY 10AETACS, Cluster, ECAT control unit, Air-conditioner unit, Multi-meter
AUDIO 20A MEMORY 10A fuse,Rear wiper control unit, Audio
(EXT) 15A Fog light relay, License platelight, Rear combination light, Position light
ILLUMI 10A DRL unit, Glove box switch,Front cigar lighter, Hazard switch, Clock, Cluster, Multi-meter, Power window switch, Rear defroster switch, Rear wiper & washer switch, Audio

*: Diesel Engine Only

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

Driver-side kick panel

1(WISHD)10A2(S/ROOF)20A3START10A
4HAZARD10A5PARKETR)10A6CKAR (FRT)10A
7(FLUDED)10A8WIPER(RF)20A9PBOCKET PR 30A
10(FELY CO.)20A11WIPER(R)10A12ACC10A
13(TOCS)20A14(FOG APR)15A15QS (MROR)10A
16ROOM LAMP10A17(SWIFMER)20A18HYPERU ALDO 30A
19STOP LAMP30A20TURN LAMP10A21(ABAG)10A
22METER10A23(TRAILER)10A24ENGINE10A
Description Fuse rating PROTECTED COMPONENT
(W/SHD) 15A Front defroster relay
(S/ROOF) 20A Sunroof unit
START 10A Transmission range switch(A/T only), starter relay
HAZARD 15A Hazard switch
P/SCK (CTR) 15A Center power outlet
CIGAR (FRT) 15A Front cigar lighter
(DRL/OBD-II) 10A DRL unit, OBD-II check connector
WIPER (FRT) 20AFront wiper, Front defroster relayFuel filter relay, Sunroof unit
P/SCK (FRT, RR) 30A Front and rear power outlet
WIPER (RR) 10A Rear wiper & washer switch, Rear wiper control unit
ACC 10A Cigar lighter relay, Power outlet relay
(RELAY COIL)10ADefroster cooling system Headlight, Heater & Air-conditioner
(TCCS)20A Transfer case control unit
(FOG (RR))15A Rear fog light (if equipped)
(O/S MIRROR)10A Electric remote control mirrorOutside rearview mirror folding control unit
ROOM LAMP 10A Cargo room light, Overhead consoleCenter room light, Door courtesy light, Sunvisor light
(S/WARMER)20A Front seat warmer
PREMIUM AUDIO30A Premium audio
STOP LAMP20A Stop light switch
TURN LAMP10AHazard switch, ETACS, DRL unit, Auto light control unitRear control unit
(A/BAG)10A Air bag control unit
METER10ACluster, Back-up light switch, Air-conditioner control unitAQS sensor. Transmission range switch (A/T only), ECAT control unit (A/T only)
(TRAILER)15A Trailer electrical system
ENGINE10AEngine control unit, Speed sensor, Transfer case control unit

KIA Sorento (2005) - IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a vehicle chassis with internal compartments and wheels (no text or symbols)

MEMORY fuse

Your vehicle is equipped with a "Memory Fuse" to prevent battery discharge if your vehicle is parked without being operated for prolonged periods. Use the following procedures before parking the vehicle for prolonged period.

  1. Turn off the engine.
  2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
  3. Open the main fuse box cover in engine compartment and pull up the "AUDIO FUSE 20A". This will change the memory fuse mode to prevent battery discharge.

CAUTION

  • If the memory fuse is pulled up from the fuse box housing, the key reminder warning chime, door ajar warning chime and light, and clock will not operate. The clock must be reset.
    • Even though the memory fuse is pulled up, the battery can still be discharged by operation of the headlights or other electrical devices.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

TOWING

KIA Sorento (2005) - TOWING - 1

natural_image Two line drawings of a flatbed truck and two cars on different platforms (no text or symbols)

KIA Sorento (2005) - TOWING - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a pickup truck and a car on a road (no text or symbols)

If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by an Authorized Kia Dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.

On 4WD Vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground.

On 2WD vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground.

KIA Sorento (2005) - TOWING - 3

text_image Two pictograms showing a car and a truck with no prohibition symbols, indicating no traffic or parking restrictions.

It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Our company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure.

\* NOTICE

  • Do not tow the vehicle forward with the rear wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.
  • Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.

When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies (2WD Vehicles or Part-time 4WD Vehicles):

  1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC position.
  2. Place the transmission shift lever in N (Neutral).
  3. Place the transfer shift knob for part-time 4WD operation in the 2HI position.
  4. Release the parking brake.

\* NOTICE

Failure to place the transmission shift lever in N (Neutral) and the transfer shift knob for part-time 4WD operation to 2H1 may cause internal damage to the transmission.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \* NOTICE - 1

text_image Tie-down hook

Tie-down hook (for flatbed towing)

CAUTION

Do not use the hooks under the rear of the vehicle for towing purposes. These hooks are designed ONLY for transport tie-down. If the tie-down hooks are used for towing, they will be damaged and this could lead to serious injury.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

natural_image Front view of a car with headlights and rear-mounted sensors (no text or symbols visible)

Towing with a vehicle other than a tow truck

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by an Authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook under the front of the vehicle. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, power train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.

  • Do not try to tow your vehicle when the wheels are stuck in mud, sand or similar substances that prevent the vehicle from being driven out under its own power.
  • Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the vehicle doing the towing.
  • The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other frequently.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

  • Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would place excessive stress on the emergency towing hook and towing cable or chain. The hook and towing cable or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.
  • If the towing vehicle can hardly move, do not forcibly continue the towing. Contact an Authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow truck service for assistance.
  • Tow the vehicle as straight ahead as possible.
  • Keep away from the vehicle during towing.

\*NOTICE

  • Attach a towing strap to the tow hook.
  • Using a portion of the vehicle other than the tow hooks for towing may damage the body of your vehicle.
  • Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing hook provided.

  • Before emergency towing, check that the hook is not broken or damaged.

  • Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.
  • Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and even force.
  • To avoid damaging the hook, do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \*NOTICE - 1

natural_image Line drawings of two SUVs with side views and chassis outlines, no text or symbols present
  • Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16 feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the middle of the strap for easy visibility.
  • Drive carefully so that the towing strap is not loosened during towing.

When Your Vehicle is Being Towed by Another Vehicle Other Than a Tow Truck (In Case Of an Emergency) (2WD Vehicles or Part-time 4WD Vehicles)

  • Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the steering wheel isn't locked.
  • Place the transmission shift lever in N (Neutral).
  • Place the transfer shift knob for part-time 4WD operation in the 2HI position.
  • Release the parking bake.
  • Vehicle equipped with automatic transmissions should not exceed 45km/h (28 mph) and should not be towed more than 80km (50 miles).

\*NOTICE

Remove the rear drive shaft if it is necessary to exceed 45km/h (28 mph) and/or 80km (50 miles). If the drive shaft cannot be removed, stop every 80km (50 miles) and start the engine. Allow the engine to idle for a few minutes. This will ensure that the transmission is sufficiently lubricated.

- Vehicle equipped with manual transmissions should not be towed in excess of 88km/h (55 mph) and should not be towed more than 645km (400 miles).

\* NOTICE

Remove the rear drive shaft if it is necessary to exceed 645km (400 miles). If the drive shaft cannot be removed, stop every 645km (400 miles) and start the engine. Allow the engine to idle for a few minutes. This will ensure that the transmission is sufficiently lubricated.

  • Press the brake pedal with more force than normal since you will have reduced brake performance.
  • More steering effort will be required because the power steering system will be disabled.
  • If you are driving down a long hill, the brakes may overheat and brake performance will be reduced. Stop often and let the brakes cool off.

\* NOTICE

To prevent internal damage to the transmission, never tow your vehicle from the rear (backwards) with all four tires in contact with the surface.

Tips for towing a stuck vehicle

The following methods are effective when your vehicle is stuck in mud, sand or similar substances that prevent the vehicle from being driven out under its own power.

- Remove the soil and sand, etc. from the front and the back of the tires.

- Place a stone or wood under the tires.

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE

KIA Sorento (2005) - IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Storing the Jack and Tools

Jack is stored in the compartment of the cargo area.

Jack handle and wheel lug nut wrench are located in the cargo area floor.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Storing the Jack and Tools - 1

natural_image Two simple line drawings of mechanical or electrical components, one with a curved arrow and the other with an angle symbol (no text or labels)

Removing the Spare Tyre

Your spare tyre is stored underneath your vehicle, directly below the cargo area.

  1. Assemble the wheel lug nut wrench to the jack handle.
  2. Open the rear hatch.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Removing the Spare Tyre - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a car interior with a side view and a close-up of the dashboard (no text or symbols)
  1. Insert the jack handle into the hole just above the rear bumper. The resistance to turning will be felt when properly engaged.
  2. Turn the jack handle counter-clockwise until the spare tyre reaches the ground. Turn the jack handle 10\~13 revolutions counter-clockwise more after the spare tyre reaches the ground, and draw the spare tyre towards rear of vehicle. Never rotate the jack handle more than 17 revolutions, otherwise the spare tyre carrier may be damaged.

A WARNING

Hold the handle firmly and turn it slowly to lower the spare tyre. The separation of the wrench from the handle could cause loss the control and personal injury.

KIA Sorento (2005) - A WARNING - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a tire assembly with a screwdriver inserted (no text or symbols)
  1. Remove the retainer from the center of the spare tyre.

KIA Sorento (2005) - A WARNING - 2

natural_image Technical line drawing of a tire with a wheel and gear (no text or symbols)

Storing the Spare Tyre

  1. Lay the tyre on the ground with the valve stem facing up.
  2. Place the wheel under the vehicle and install the retainer through the wheel center.
  3. Turn the handle until it clicks.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

Changing Tyres

Jacking instructions

The jack is provided for emergency tyre changing only.

Follow jacking instructions to reduce the possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changing Tyres

  • Never attempt vehicle repairs in the traffic lanes of a public road or highway.
  • Always move the vehicle completely off the road and onto the shoulder before trying to change a tyre. The jack should be used on level firm ground whenever possible. If you cannot find a firm, level place off the road, call a towing service company for assistance.
  • Do not exceed the jack's maximum permissible load: 2,000 kg (4,400 lbs.).

(Continued)

(Continued)

  • Be sure to use the correct front and rear jacking positions on the vehicle; never use the bumpers or any other part of the vehicle for jack support.
    • The vehicle can easily roll off the jack causing serious injury or death. No person should place any portion of their body under a vehicle that is supported only by a jack; use vehicle support stands.
  • Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jack.

KIA Sorento (2005) - (Continued) - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car with no visible text, numbers, or symbols on the vehicle itself

Tyre replacement

  1. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake firmly.
  2. Shift into R (Reverse) with manual transmission or P (Park) with automatic transmission.
  3. Activate the hazard warning flash-er.

  4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, jack, jack handle, and spare tyre from the vehicle.

  5. Block both the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the jack position.

WARNING - Changing a Tyre

• To prevent vehicle movements while changing a tyre, always set the parking brake fully, and always block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed.
- It is recommended that the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and that no person should remain in a vehicle that is being jacked.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - Changing a Tyre - 1

natural_image Diagram of a car wheel and tire assembly with a directional arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)
  1. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do not remove any nut until the tyre has been raised off the ground.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

KIA Sorento (2005) - IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a car showing front, side, and top views with no visible text or symbols
  1. Place the jack at the front or rear jacking position closest to the tyre you are changing.

KIA Sorento (2005) - IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY - 2

text_image JACK 2BLC601

WARNING - Jack Location To reduce the possibility of injury, be sure to use only the jack provided with the vehicle and in the correct jack position; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

KIA Sorento (2005) - IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY - 3

text_image A621A
  1. Securely tighten the valve of the jack. Move the jack handle up and down until the top of the jack contacts the proper point and takes on a slight load.
    Raise the vehicle until the tyre just clears the ground (approximately 30 mm (1.2 in)). Never raise the wheel higher. Before removing the wheel lug nuts, make sure the vehicle is stable and that there is no chance for it to slip or move.

  2. Remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them counterclockwise, then remove the wheel.

KIA Sorento (2005) - IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY - 4

natural_image Technical line drawing of a car tire and wheel assembly (no text or symbols)
  1. Mount the spare tyre into position and install the wheel lug nuts with the beveled edge inward.

KIA Sorento (2005) - IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY - 5

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever mechanism with no visible text or symbols
  1. Gradually loosen the valve of the jack with the groove on the jack handle to lower the vehicle.

KIA Sorento (2005) - IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY - 6

text_image ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ 2BLA623
  1. Once the wheel lug nuts have been tightened, lower the vehicle fully to the ground and continue to tighten the lug nuts until they are fully secured. Tighten the wheel lug nuts firmly in a "star" pattern. If you are unsure of the tightness of the wheel lug nuts, have them checked at the nearest service station. The specified tightening torque is 9–12 kg·m (65-87 lb·ft, 88-118 N·m).

CAUTION

Your vehicle has metric threads on the wheel studs and nuts. Make certain during wheel removal that the same nuts removed are reinstalled - or, if replaced, that nuts with metric threads and the same chamfer configuration are used. Installation of a non-metric thread nut on a metric stud or vice-versa will not secure the wheel to the hub properly and will damage the stud so that it must be replaced. Note that most lug nuts do not have metric threads. Be sure to use extreme care in checking for thread style before installing aftermarket lug nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer.

WARNING - Wheel Studs

If the studs are damaged, they may lose their ability to retain the wheel. This could lead to the loss of the wheel and a collision.

To prevent the jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut, wrench and spare tyre from rattling while the vehicle is in motion, store them properly. To store the flat fire, refer to "Storing the spare tyre" in this section.

\* NOTICE

Check the inflation pressures as soon as possible after installing the spare tyre. Adjust it to the specified pressure, if necessary. Refer to Section 8, Specifications.

MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Services 7-2

Normal Maintenance Schedule 7-4

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions .....7-8

Owner Maintenance 7-9

Engine Compartment 7-12

Engine Oil and Oil Filter 7-14

Engine Cooling System 7-17

Brakes and Clutch 7-20

Parking Brake 7-21

Power Steering 7-22

Automatic Transmission 7-23

Manual Transmission 7-26

Front / Rear Differential 7-28

Transfer Case (4WD) 7-29

Lubricants and Fluids 7-30

Fuel Filter and Sedimenter (For Diesel) 7-31

Air Cleaner 7-32

Wiper Blades 7-33

Battery 7-35

Tyres and Wheels 7-38

Bulb Replacement 7-45

Lubricant Specifications 7-55

Exterior Care 7-57

Interior Care 7-61

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.

Should you have any doubts concerning the inspection or servicing of your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you have an Authorized Kia Dealer perform this work.

An Authorized Kia Dealer has factory-trained technicians and genuine Kia parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see an Authorized Kia Dealer.

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury.

Owner's Responsibility

\* NOTICE

Maintenance Service and Record Retention are the owner's responsibility.

You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your Kia warranties.

Detailed warranty information is provided in your Warranty Information Booklet.

Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered.

We recommend to have your car repaired and maintained by an Authorized Kia Dealer or repairer: this person shall indeed meet our quality standards and may give you a service of high quality level.

Scheduled Maintenance Service

Follow NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply. If any of the following conditions apply, follow MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS.

• Repeated short distance driving.
- Driving in dusty conditions.
- Driving with an extensive use of brakes.
- Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are being used.
- Driving on rough or muddy roads.
- Extended periods of idling or low speed operation.
- Driving for a prolonged period in cold temperatures and/or extremely humid climates.

If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal Maintenance Schedule. After 96month or 120,000km (80,000 miles) continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.

MAINTENANCE

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS MAINTENANCE ITEMNumber of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months12 24 36 4860 72 84 96
Miles×1,00010 2030 40 50 6070 80
Km×1,00015 3045 60 75 90105 120
Drive belts*GasolineIII
Diesel IIII
Engine oil and engine oil filterGasolineRRRRRRRR
DieselRRRRRRRR
Manual transmission fluidIII
Auto transmission fluidEurope & AustraliaIIIIIRII
Except Europe & AustraliaIIIIIIII
Front and rear differential fluidEurope & AustraliaIRIRIRIR
Except Europe & AustraliaInspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) and replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles)
Transfer case fluid (4WD)IIIIIIII
Engine timing beltGasolineI R
Air cleaner elementGasolineRRRR
DieselRRRR

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R : Replace or change.
" : Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive belt) and air conditioner drive belt (if equipped).
Inspect and if necessary correct or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (cont.)

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS/MAINTENANCE ITEMNumber of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months2 24 36 4860 72 84 96
Miles×1,00010 2080 40 50 6070 80
Km×1,00015 3045 60 75 90105 120
Spark plugsFor EuropeLeadedR RRR
UnleadedR
Except EuropeLeadedReplace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles)
UnleadedReplace every 100,000 km (62,000 miles)
Cooling system(Including coolant level adjustment)IIIIIIII
Engine coolantEurope & Australia ^2 At first, Replace at 60 months or 90,000 km (60,000 miles): after that replace every 24 months or 45,000 km (30,000 miles)
Except Europe & AustraliaReplace every 24 months or 45,000 km (30,000 miles)
Vapor hose and fuel filler capIIII
Vacuum and crankcase ventilation hosesIIII
Vacuum hose(for EGR & throttle body)DieselIIIIIIII
Alternator vacuum pumpDieselIIIIIIII

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R : Replace or change.
^2 : When adding coolant, use only a qualified coolant additive for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

MAINTENANCE

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (cont.)

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS MAINTENANCE ITEMNumber of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months12 24 36 4860 72 84 96
Miles×1,00010 20 3040 50 6070 80
Km×1,00015 3045 60 75 90105 120
Alternator oil hose and vacuum hoseDiesel IIII
Fuel filterGasolineRR
DieselRRRR
Fuel lines and hosesIIII
Battery conditionIIII
All electrical systems (including the light bulbs)IIIIIIII
Front impact sensor connectorIII
Brake lines, Hoses and connectionsIII
Brake pedalIIII
Parking brakeIIIIIIII
Clutch pedalIIII
Brake and clutch fluidEurope & AustraliaIRIRIRIR
Ecopt Europe & AustraliaIIIIIIII
Disc brake I I I I IIII
Throttle body cleaning (with removing carbon) ^1 IIIIIIIII
Power steering fluidIIIIIIIII
Power steering system and hosesIIII
Tyre (Pressure & Tread wear)IIIIIIIII
Front suspension ball jointsIIII
Air conditioner refrigerant (If equipped)IIIIIIIII
Air conditioner compressor (If equipped)IIIIIIIII

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R : Replace or change

*3 : Be careful not to damage to the emission control system when cleaning the throttle body.

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.

Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace

MAINTENANCE ITEMMaintenance operationMaintenance intervalsDriving condition
Engine oil and engine oil filterGasolineR Every 4,500 miles (7,500 km) or 6 months A, B, C, DE,F, G, H, I, J
DieselEurope & Australia
Except Europe & AustraliaREvery 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 6 months
Air cleaner elementR More frequentlyC, E
Engine timing beltGasolineREvery 40,000 miles (60,000 km) or 48 monthsD, E, F, G
Spark plugGasolineRMore frequentlyB, H
Automatic transmission fluidEurope & AustraliaR Every 30,000 miles (45,000 km)A, C, E, F, G, H, I
Except Europe & AustraliaR Every 25,000 miles (40,000 km)A, C, E, F, G, H, I
Manual transmission fluidEurope & AustraliaR Every 60,000 miles (90,000 km)C, D, E, G, H, I, J
Except Europe & AustraliaR Every 62,000 miles (100,000 km)
Transfer case fluid (4WD)Europe & AustraliaR Every 60,000 miles (90,000 km)C,E,G,I
Except Europe & AustraliaR Every 62,000 miles (100,000 km)
Front and rear differential fluidEurope & AustraliaR Every 10,000 miles (15,000 km)C,E,G,I
Except Europe & AustraliaR Every 12,500 miles (20,000 km)

Severe Driving Conditions

A : Repeated short distance driving

B : Extensive idling

C : Driving in dusty, rough roads

7-8

D : Driving in areas using salt or other corro-

sive materials or in very cold weather

E : Driving in sandy areas

F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 32°C (90 °F)

G : Driving in mountainous areas.

H : Towing a trailer

I: Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car

or vehicle towing

J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)

OWNER MAINTENANCE

Owner Maintenance Schedule

The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be performed by the owner or qualified service technician at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehicle. Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your dealer or qualified service technician for service advice as soon as possible. These Owner Maintenance Checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labor, parts and lubricants used.

When you stop for fuel:

  • Check the engine oil level.
  • Check coolant level in coolant reservoir.

WARNING

Be careful when checking your engine coolant level when the engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure. This could cause serious injury.

  • Check the windshield washer fluid level.
  • Look for low or under-inflated tyres.

While operating your vehicle:

  • Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
  • Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straight-ahead position.
  • Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or "pulls" to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.
  • When stopping, listen and check for strange sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or "hard-to-push" brake pedal.

MAINTENANCE

  • If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transmission occurs, check the transmission fluid level.
  • Check automatic transmission P (Park) function.
  • Check parking brake.
  • Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle (water dripping from the air conditioning system after use is normal).

At least monthly:

  • Check coolant level in the coolant recovery reservoir.
  • Check the operation of all exterior lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.
  • Check the inflation pressures of all tyres including the spare.

At least twice a year

(i.e., every Spring and Fall):

  • Check radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
  • Check windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.
  • Check headlight alignment.
  • Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields and clamps.
  • Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear and function.
  • Check for worn tyres and loose wheel lug nuts.

At least once a year :

  • Clean body and door drain holes.
  • Lubricate door hinges and checks, and hood hinges.
  • Lubricate door and hood locks and latches.
  • Lubricate door rubber weather-strips.
  • Check the air conditioning system before the warm weather season.
  • Check the power steering fluid level.
  • Inspect and lubricate automatic transmission linkage and controls.
  • Clean battery and terminals.
  • Check the brake fluid level.

Owner Maintenance Precautions

Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform.

As explained earlier in this section, several procedures can be done only by a qualified service technician with special tools.

Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Kia Warranty Information Booklet provided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

WARNING - Maintenance Work

- Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. You can be seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedures. If you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do the work, have it done by a qualified technician.

- Working under the hood with the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even more dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing. These can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury. Therefore, if you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling fans.

WARNING - Engine Cooling Fans (Gasoline Engine)

Because your gasoline engine cooling fans are electrically controlled, they will run if the ignition switch is on, even if the engine is not running. This could cause serious injury. To prevent this, be sure the ignition is off, unless you must run the engine while performing maintenance or an inspection.

MAINTENANCE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Diesel Engine
KIA Sorento (2005) - ENGINE COMPARTMENT - 1

text_image 124 35 12 6 7 8 9 10 1111
  1. Engine coolant reservoir
  2. Coolant reservoir cap
  3. Auto transmission fluid dipstick
  4. Engine oil filler cap
  5. Brake / clutch fluid reservoir
  6. Air cleaner
  7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
  8. Power steering fluid reservoir
  9. Engine oil dipstick
  10. Battery
  11. Fuse box
  12. Fuel filter and sedimenter

RBLA701

3.51 Gasoline Engine
KIA Sorento (2005) - ENGINE COMPARTMENT - 2

text_image 124 35 V8 DEK-CITY 3500 6 7 8 9 10 11
  1. Engine coolant reservoir
  2. Coolant reservoir cap
  3. Auto transmission fluid dipstick
  4. Engine oil filler cap
  5. Brake / clutch fluid reservoir
  6. Air cleaner
  7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
  8. Power steering fluid reservoir
  9. Engine oil dipstick
  10. Battery
  11. Fuse box

2.4I Gasoline Engine
KIA Sorento (2005) - ENGINE COMPARTMENT - 3

text_image Technical diagram of a car engine bay with numbered components for identification

RBLA702/RBLS701

MAINTENANCE

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

Checking the Engine Oil Level

  1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
  2. Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature.
  3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes for the oil to return to the oil pan.
  4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and re-insert it fully.
  5. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F and L.
    If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring the level to F. Do not overfill.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Checking the Engine Oil Level - 1

text_image OK F • • L 2BLA704

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer to "Recommended Lubricants" later in this section.)

Changing the engine oil and filter

Change engine oil and filter according to the Scheduled Maintenance at the beginning of this section.

WARNING

Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

  1. Warm the engine up for a few minutes and then turn it off.
  2. Raise and suitably support the vehicle.

KIA Sorento (2005) - WARNING - 1

WARNING - Lifting your vehicle

If you raise your vehicle, always ensure that it is supported at all four jacking or lift points for the vehicle. Do not use jacks meant for tyre changes. Use only lift equipment specifically recommended for doing maintenance work under the vehicle. Place the vehicle and lift equipment on a hard, level surface capable of supporting the full weight of the vehicle without moving or deforming. If the support is not stable, the vehicle could fall and cause serious or fatal injuries. Follow the instructions with the lift device.

  1. Remove the oil filler cap.
  2. Drain the oil into a suitable container by removing the oil drain plug.

CAUTION

  • Both the oil and engine are hot. Do not burn yourself.
  • Keep all engine oil out of the reach of children.
  • Remove the engine oil filter with an oil filter wrench.

\* NOTICE

Do not allow the oil filter gasket to remain on the oil filter mounting surface. This will cause oil leakage and engine damage. Remove the old gasket completely so that a new gasket may be properly seated.

  1. Use a clean rag to clean the oil filter mounting surface on the engine.
  2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to the new oil filter O-ring seal.
  3. Install the oil filter and tighten it. (Refer to the oil filter caution label for tightening instructions.)
  4. Install a new washer on the drain plug. Don't use an old washer repeatedly.
  5. Replace the drain plug after the oil has thoroughly drained.

Tightening torque

3.5\~4.6 kg•m (26\~33 lb•ft, 35\~46 N•m)

  1. Remove the dipstick.

CAUTION

When you refill the new oil using a funnel, you should fill the oil dividing it half and half. Then, fill the first half, and the other half after 1 minute.

MAINTENANCE

  1. Refill the engine with new oil to the F mark on the dipstick slowly. Do not overfill.
  2. Reinstall the oil filler cap and dipstick securely.
  3. Start the engine and inspect around the oil filter seal for leaks. Stop the engine.
  4. Check the oil level and fill to the F mark as necessary.

Oil capacity

Diesel engine

Without filter change : 7.4 liters (7.82 US qt.)

With filter change : 8.2 liters (8.660 US qt.)

Gasoline engine

Without filter change : 4.0 liters (4.22 US qt.)

With filter change : 4.3 liters (4.54 US qt.)

Use only the specified Service Grade engine oil. (Refer to "Recommended Lubricants" later in this section.)

\*NOTICE

  • Although oil filters may have the same external appearance, their internal designs differ significantly. These filters are not interchangeable. To avoid potential engine damage, use only the specified filter. Consult an Authorized Kia Dealer.
  • Follow these instructions carefully. An improper oil filter installation can cause oil leakage and engine damage. Drained engine oil should be disposed of properly, according to local environmental protection agency codes. It should not be thrown down the drain or in the trash.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and coolant level at least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season, and before traveling to a colder climate.

Checking the Coolant Level

WARNING - Removing Coolant Reservoir Cap

- Never attempt to remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is operating or hot. Doing so might lead to cooling system and engine damage and could result in serious personal injury from escaping hot coolant or steam.

- Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. Even then, use extreme care when removing the coolant reservoir cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cooling system. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.

- Even if the engine is not operating, do not remove the coolant reservoir cap or the drain plug while the engine and radiator are hot. Hot coolant and steam may still blow out under pressure, causing serious injury.

MAINTENANCE

KIA Sorento (2005) - MAINTENANCE - 1

text_image VIX M16 RBLA705

Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled between MAX and MIN marked on the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough specified coolant to provide protection against freezing and corrosion. Bring the level to MAX, but do not overfill. If frequent additions are required, see an Authorized Kia Dealer for a cooling system inspection.

Changing Coolant

Change coolant according to the Maintenance Schedule.

  • Use only soft (de-mineralized) water in the coolant mixture.
  • The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol-based coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.
  • DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.
  • Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze, which would reduce the effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.

PROTECTIONMixture Percentage (volume)
Coolant SolutionWater
Above -16°C (3°F) 35 65
Above -26°C (-15°F) 45 55
Above -40°C (-40°F) 55 45

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not remove the coolant reservoir cap or loosen the drain plug if the engine is hot.

  1. Turn the coolant reservoir cap counterclockwise to remove it.
  2. Loosen the radiator drain plug and drain the coolant into a suitable container.
  3. With the plug loose, flush the system with running water.
  4. Drain the system completely and retighten the drain plug. Add the necessary amount of ethylene-glycol based coolant and water to provide the required protection against freezing and corrosion. In extremely cold climates, add ethylene-glycol based coolant in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer.

  5. Run the engine at idle with the coolant reservoir cap off. Slowly add additional coolant as necessary.

  6. At this point, wait until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. Depress the accelerator two or three times; then add coolant as required. Be careful not to burn yourself.
  7. Reinstall the coolant reservoir cap. Inspect all connections for leaks and recheck the coolant level in the reservoir. Recheck again after a few days and add coolant as necessary.

MAINTENANCE

BRAKES AND CLUTCH

KIA Sorento (2005) - BRAKES AND CLUTCH - 1

text_image 10K RBLA706

Checking Brake/Clutch Fluid Level

The brake system and the hydraulic clutch system share the same master cylinder reservoir. Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be between MAX and MIN marked on the side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX level. The level will fall with accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake/clutch linings. If the fluid level is excessively low, have the brake/clutch system checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

Use only the specified brake/clutch fluid. (Refer to "Recommended Lubricants" later in this section.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

\*NOTICE

In the event the brake/clutch system requires frequent additions of fluid, the vehicle should be inspected by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

WARNING

When changing and adding brake/clutch fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it come in contact with your eyes. If brake/clutch fluid should come in contact with your eyes, immediately flush them with a large quantity of fresh tap water. Have your eyes examined by a doctor as soon as possible.

CAUTION

Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint damage will result. Brake/clutch fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be thrown out. Don't put in the wrong kind of fluid. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake clutch system can damage brake clutch system parts.

PARKING BRAKE
KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior showing hand placement and seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols)

Stroke :

6\~8 "clicks" at a force of 10kg (22 lbs., 98N)

Checking the Parking Brake

Check the stroke of the parking brake by counting the number of "clicks" heard while fully applying it from the released position. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the number of "clicks" is more or less than specified, have the parking brake adjusted by an Authorized Kia Dealer or another competent repair center.

MAINTENANCE

POWER STEERING

KIA Sorento (2005) - POWER STEERING - 1

text_image HIGH LOW OK 2BLA708

Checking the Power Steering Fluid Level

With the vehicle on level ground, check the fluid level in the power steering reservoir periodically. The fluid should be between HIGH and LOW marked on the side of the reservoir.

Before adding power steering fluid, thoroughly clean the area around the reservoir cap to prevent power steering fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the HIGH level.

In the event the power steering system requires frequent addition of fluid, the vehicle should be inspected by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

\* NOTICE

To avoid damage to the power steering pump, do not operate the vehicle for prolonged periods with a low power steering fluid level.

Use only the specified power steering fluid. (Refer to "Recommended Lubricants" later in this section.)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)

KIA Sorento (2005) - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) - 1

text_image Automatic transmission fluid dipstick RBLA711

Checking the Automatic Transmission Fluid Level

The automatic transmission fluid level should be checked regularly.

The volume of the transmission fluid changes with temperature. Although it is best to check the level after having driven the vehicle for at least 30 minutes, the level can be checked after warming the fluid using the procedure below.

CAUTION

  • Low fluid level causes transmission slippage. Overfilling can cause foaming, loss of fluid and transmission malfunction.
  • The use of a non-specified fluid could result in transmission malfunction and failure.

WARNING - Parking Brake

To avoid sudden movement of the vehicle, apply parking brake and depress the brake pedal before moving the shift lever.

  1. Park the vehicle on level ground and firmly apply the parking brake.
  2. Allow the engine to idle for about 2 minutes.
  3. Depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever slowly through all ranges then set it in P (Park).
  4. With the engine still idling, pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it fully.

MAINTENANCE

KIA Sorento (2005) - MAINTENANCE - 1

text_image Hot fluid scale Low OK Full 25°C 75°C Low OK Full Cold fluid scale 2BLA712A
  1. Pull out the dipstick again and check the fluid level.
    If the fluid has been warmed to normal operating temperature of approximately 75^ C ( 167^ F), the fluid level should be between the 2 notches marked 75^ C.

\* NOTICE

The notch on the 25°C (77°F) scale is for reference only and should NOT be used to determine transmission fluid level.

\*NOTICE

New automatic transaxle fluid should be red. The red dye is added so the assembly plant can identify it as automatic transaxle fluid and distinguishes it from engine oil or antifreeze. The red dye, which is not an indicator of fluid quality, is not permanent. As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transaxle fluid will begin to look darker. The color may eventually appear light brown. Therefore, have an Authorized Kia dealer change the automatic transaxle fluid according to the Scheduled Maintenance at the beginning of this section.

Changing the Automatic Transmission Fluid

  1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle.

WARNING - Lifting Your Vehicle

If you raise your vehicle, always ensure that it is supported at all four jacking or lift points for the vehicle. Only if this level of support is provided can you ensure that the vehicle will remain stable and not fall off the jack stands or other supports. If you do not provide such support, the vehicle may fall off the jack stands, or other supports, causing serious injury or death.

  1. Remove the drain plug located at the bottom center front of the transmission pan.
  2. After the oil has drained completely, install a new washer on the plug, reinstall the drain plug, and tighten to 75 kg·cm (65 lb·in, 7.4 N·m).
  3. Lower the vehicle.
  4. Remove the automatic transmission dipstick located near the center of the engine compartment bulkhead and, using a funnel, add approximately 2 liters (2 US quarts) of automatic transmission fluid (DEXRON II).

\* NOTICE

Do NOT overfill the automatic transmission reservoir. Doing so can cause a seal "blow out", loss of fluid, and damage to the transmission. If you overfill the reservoir, you must drain the excess prior to driving the vehicle. The transmission will hold 2.51. when completely empty. However, it is likely that there will be fluid left in the transmission after draining, especially if the front of the vehicle was raised to remove the drain plug.

  1. Check the fluid level. If necessary, add a small amount of fluid and check the level again. Continue this process until the level reads between the 75^ C ( 167^ F) notches.
  2. Replace the dipstick and properly dispose of the used transmission fluid.

MAINTENANCE

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)

Checking the Manual Transmission Fluid Level

  1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle.

⚠ WARNING - Lifting Your Vehicle

If you raise your vehicle, always ensure that it is supported at all four jacking or lift points for the vehicle. Only if this level of support is provided can you ensure that the vehicle will remain stable and not fall off the jack stands or other supports. If you do not provide such support, the vehicle may fall off the jack stands, or other supports, causing serious injury or death.

KIA Sorento (2005) - ⚠ WARNING - Lifting Your Vehicle - 1

text_image Drain plug Fillcheck plug 2BLA709
  1. Remove the fill/check plug on the side of the transmission.

KIA Sorento (2005) - ⚠ WARNING - Lifting Your Vehicle - 2

text_image Correct fluid level 2BLA710
  1. Verify that the fluid level reaches the bottom of the fill/check hole. Fill as necessary.

If the fluid level is low, check for leaks before adding fluid. Do not overfill.

Use only the specified manual transmission fluid. (Refer to "Recommended Lubricants" later in this section.)

  1. Install a new washer on the fill/check plug and tighten the plug to 6.0\~6.6 kg•m (43\~48 lb•ft, 60\~65 N•m).

Changing the Manual Transmission Fluid

  1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle.
  2. Remove the drain plug on the bottom of the transmission.
  3. After the fluid has drained completely, install a new washer on the plug, reinstall the drain plug and tighten to 6.0\~6.6 kg•m (43\~48 lb•ft, 60\~65 N•m)
  4. Remove the fill/check plug on the side of the transmission.

  5. Add fluid through the fill/check hole until it reaches the bottom of the fill/check hole.

  6. Install a new washer on the fill/check plug.
  7. Reinstall and tighten the fill/check plug to 6.0\~6.6 kg•m (43\~48 lb•ft, 60\~65 N•m).

Use only the specified manual transmission fluid. (Refer to "Recommended Lubricants" later in this section.)

MAINTENANCE

FRONT / REAR DIFFERENTIAL

KIA Sorento (2005) - FRONT / REAR DIFFERENTIAL - 1

text_image ■ Front Fill/Check plug Drain Plug ■ Rear Fill/Check plug Drain Plug 2BLA780/2BLA753

Checking the Front / Rear Differential Fluid

  1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle.

WARNING - Lifting Your Vehicle

If you raise your vehicle, always ensure that it is supported at all four jacking or lift points for the vehicle. Only if this level of support is provided can you ensure that the vehicle will remain stable and not fall off the jack stands or other supports. If you do not provide such support, the vehicle may fall off the jack stands, or other supports, causing serious injury or death.

  1. Remove the fill/check plug on the side of the front/rear differential.
  2. Verify that the fluid level reaches the bottom of the fill/check hole. Fill as necessary.

If the fluid level is low, check for leaks before adding fluid. Do not overfill. Use only the specified front/rear differential fluid. (Refer to "Recommended Lubricants" later in this section.)

  1. Install a new washer on the fill/check plug and tighten the plug to 3.8\~5.3 kg•m (28\~38 lb•ft, 37-52 N•m).

TRANSFER CASE (4WD)

KIA Sorento (2005) - TRANSFER CASE (4WD) - 1

text_image Fill check plug Drain plug 2BLA754

Checking the Transfer Case Fluid

  1. Raise and suitably support the vehicle.

WARNING - Lifting Your Vehicle

If you raise your vehicle, always ensure that it is supported at all four jacking or lift points for the vehicle. Only if this level of support is provided can you ensure that the vehicle will remain stable and not fall off the jack stands or other supports. If you do not provide such support, the vehicle may fall off the jack stands, or other supports, causing serious injury or death.

  1. Remove the fill/check plug on the side of the transfer case.
  2. Verify that the fluid level reaches the bottom of the fill/check hole. Fill as necessary.

If the fluid level is low, check for leaks before adding fluid. Do not overfill.

Use only the specified transfer case fluid. (Refer to "Recommended Lubricants" later in this section.)

  1. Install a new washer on the fill/check plug and tighten the plug to 2–3 kg•m (14-22 lb•ft, 30 N•m)

MAINTENANCE

LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS

KIA Sorento (2005) - LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS - 1

text_image Washer fluid 2BLA713

Checking the Washer Fluid Level

The reservoir is translucent so that you can check the level with a quick visual inspection.

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available. However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.

WARNING

  • Do not use radiator coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.
  • Radiator coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control or damage to paint and body trim.
  • Windshield Washer fluid agents contain some amounts of alcohol and can be flammable under certain circumstances. Do not allow sparks or flame to contact the washer fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Damage to the vehicle or it's occupants could occur.
  • Windshield washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals. Do not drink and avoid contacting windshield washer fluid. Serious injury or death could occur.

Body Lubrication

All moving points of the body, such as door hinges, hood hinges, and locks, should be lubricated each time the engine oil is changed. Use a non-freezing lubricant on locks during cold weather.

Make sure the engine hood secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

FUEL FILTER AND

SEDIMENTER (FOR DIESEL)

Then sedimenter in the fuel filter plays an important role of separating water from fuel and accumulating the water in its bottom.

If water accumulates in the sedi- menter, the warning light comes on when the ignition key is in the "ON" position.

CAUTION

If the water accumulated in the sedimenter is not drained at proper times, damages to the major parts such as pump priming plunger can be caused by water permeation in the fuel filter.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

natural_image Technical diagram of an engine component with no visible text or symbols

Extracting Air in the Fuel System

If you drove until you have no fuel left or if you replaced the fuel filter, be sure to extract air in the fuel system as it makes you difficult to start the engine.

  • Remove the air extract plug on the top of the fuel filter.
  • Pump up and down until the fuel flows out of the plug opening.
  • Set the plug firmly into place if air has been extracted.

\* NOTICE

  • Use cloths when you extract air so that the fuel is not sprayed around.
  • Clean the fuel around the fuel filter or the injection pump before starting the engine to prevent fire.
  • Finally, check each part if the fuel is leaking.

MAINTENANCE

KIA Sorento (2005) - MAINTENANCE - 1

text_image Pump priming plunger Air extract plug Drain plug

Draining Water from Sedimenter

  • Place a water tray under the sedi- menter.
  • Loosen the drain plug and drain water.
    • After water is drained, securely tighten the drain plug.
  • Pump the pump priming plunger and check to make sure that no fuel is leaking from the drain plug.
    • After starting the engine, check to make certain the sedimenter warning light is off.

AIR CLEANER
KIA Sorento (2005) - Draining Water from Sedimenter - 1

natural_image Technical diagram of a vehicle engine compartment showing internal components and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Element Replacement

A viscous paper air cleaner filter is used. It must be replaced when necessary, and should not be cleaned and reused.

  1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching clips and open the cover.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Element Replacement - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols
  1. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing with a clean, damp cloth.
  2. Replace the air cleaner element.
  3. Lock the cover with the cover attaching clips.

Replace the element according to the Scheduled Maintenance Section.

If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended intervals. (Refer to Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions in this section.)

CAUTION

  • Do not drive with the air cleaner removed; this will result in excessive engine wear.
  • Driving without an air cleaner encourages backfiring, which could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
  • When removing the air cleaner element, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result.

WIPER BLADES

Wiper Blade Maintenance

\* NOTICE

Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to make the windshield difficult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thoroughly with clean water.

MAINTENANCE

\*NOTICE

To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement.

\* NOTICE

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

\* NOTICE

The use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \* NOTICE - 1

text_image Push Plastic locking clip AN7B07016
  1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade assembly to expose the plastic locking clip. Compress the clip and slide the blade assembly downward; then lift it off the arm.

\* NOTICE

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \* NOTICE - 1

text_image Metal support Pull out Tabs AN7B07017
  1. Firmly grasp the end of the rubber blade and pull until the tabs are free of the metal support.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \* NOTICE - 2

text_image Retainer Retainer AN7B07018 A
  1. Remove the metal retainers from the rubber blade and install them in the new rubber blade.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \* NOTICE - 3

natural_image Line drawing of a long, elongated object with a circular end marked (no text or symbols)
  1. Carefully insert a new rubber blade and install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

\* NOTICE

Do not bend the metal retainers.

Install the blade with the tabs facing towards the bottom of the wiper arm.

BATTERY

WARNING - Battery dangers

KIA Sorento (2005) - BATTERY - 1

Always read the following instructions carefully when handling a battery.

KIA Sorento (2005) - BATTERY - 2

Keep lighted cigarettes and all other flames or sparks away from the battery.

KIA Sorento (2005) - BATTERY - 3

Hydrogen, which is a highly combustible gas, is always present in battery cells and may explode if ignited.

KIA Sorento (2005) - BATTERY - 4

Keep batteries out of the reach of children because batteries contain highly corrosive SULFURIC ACID. Do not allow battery acid to contact your skin, eyes, clothing or paint finish.

(Continued)

MAINTENANCE

(Continued)

KIA Sorento (2005) - (Continued) - 1

If any electrolyte gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth until medical attention is received.

If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contacted area. If you feel a pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

KIA Sorento (2005) - (Continued) - 2

Wear eye protection when charging or working near a battery. Always provide ventilation when working in an enclosed space.

(Continued)

(Continued)

  • When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak, resulting in personal injury. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.
  • Never attempt to charge the battery when the battery cables are connected.
  • The electrical ignition system works with high voltage. Never touch these components with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

KIA Sorento (2005) - (Continued) - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a battery with a handle and cooling fins (no text or symbols)

For best Battery Service :

  • Keep the battery securely mounted.
  • Keep the battery top clean and dry.
  • Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
  • Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.
  • If the vehicle is not going to be used for an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.

Battery Recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, calcium-based battery.

  • If the battery becomes discharged in a short time (because, for example, the headlights or interior lights were left on while the vehicle was not in use), recharge it by slow charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
  • If the battery gradually discharges because of high electric load while the vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

Items to be reset after the battery has been replaced or the battery cables have been disconnected and reinstalled.

• Sunroof (See page 3-76)
• Clock (See page 3-81)
• Multi-Meter (See page 4-53)
• Climate control system (See pages 4-85 and 4-87)

⚠ WARNING - Recharging Battery

When recharging the battery, observe the following precautions:

  • The battery must be removed from the vehicle and placed in an area with good ventilation.
  • Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or flame near the battery.
  • Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin gassing (boiling) violently or if the temperature of the electrolyte of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
  • Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.

  • Disconnect the battery charger in the following order.

  • Turn off the battery charger main switch.
  • Unhook the negative clamp from the negative battery terminal.
  • Unhook the positive clamp from the positive battery terminal.

\*NOTICE

  • Before performing maintenance or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories and stop the engine.
  • The negative battery cable must be removed first and installed last when the battery is disconnected.

MAINTENANCE

TYRES AND WHEELS

Tyres Care

For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tyre inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.

Inflation Pressures

All tyre pressures (including the spare) should be checked monthly when the tyres are cold. "Cold Tyres" means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1.6 km (one mile).

Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, top vehicle handling, and minimum tyre wear.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Inflation Pressures - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label attached to the front driver's door sill. All 4 tyres and the full-size spare should be inflated to 240 kPa (35 psi).

A WARNING

Severe underinflation (70 kPa (10 psi) or more) can lead to severe heat build-up, especially on hot days and when driving at high speed. This can potentially cause tread separation and other tyre irregularities to appear that can result in the loss of vehicle control leading to severe injury or death.

\*NOTICE

  • Warm tyres normally exceed recommended cold tyre pressures by 28 to 41kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not release air from warm tyres to adjust the pressure or the tyres will be underinflated.
  • Underinflation results in excessive wear, poor handling, reduced fuel economy, and the possibility of blowouts from overheated tyres. Also, low tyre pressure can cause poor sealing of the tyre bead. If the tyre pressure is excessively low, wheel deformation and/or tyre separation is possible. So, keep your tyre pressures at the proper levels. If a tyre frequently needs refilling, have it checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer.

• Overinflation produces a harsh ride, handling problems, excessive wear at the center of the tyre tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.
- Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If the cap have been lost, install new one as soon as possible.

⚠ WARNING - Tyre Inflation

Overinflation or underinflation can reduce tyre life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tyre failure. This could result in loss of vehicle control.

Tyre Rotation

To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tyres be rotated every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tyres for correct balance.

When rotating tyres, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tyre pressure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tyre. Replace the tyre if you find either of these conditions. Replace the tyre also if you can see fabric or cord. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tyre pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness.

Refer to Section 8, Specifications.

MAINTENANCE

KIA Sorento (2005) - MAINTENANCE - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    subgraph "With a full-size spare tyre"
        A1[" "] --> B1[" "]
        A2[" "] --> C1[" "]
        A3[" "] --> D1[" "]
        A4[" "] --> E1[" "]
        A5[" "] --> F1[" "]
        A6[" "] --> G1[" "]
        A7[" "] --> H1[" "]
        A8[" "] --> I1[" "]
        A9[" "] --> J1[" "]
        A10[" "] --> K1[" "]
        A11[" "] --> L1[" "]
        A12[" "] --> M1[" "]
        A13[" "] --> N1[" "]
        A14[" "] --> O1[" "]
        A15[" "] --> P1[" "]
        A16[" "] --> Q1[" "]
        A17[" "] --> R1[" "]
        A18[" "] --> S1[" "]
        A19[" "] --> T1[" "]
        A20[" "] --> U1[" "]
        A21[" "] --> V1[" "]
        A22[" "] --> W1[" "]
        A23[" "] --> X1[" "]
        A24[" "] --> Y1[" "]
        A25[" "] --> Z1[" "]
        A26[" "] --> AA1[" "]
        A27[" "] --> AB1[" "]
        A28[" "] --> AC1[" "]
        A29[" "] --> AD1[" "]
        A30[" "] --> AE1[" "]
        A31[" "] --> AF1[" "]
        A32[" "] --> AG1[" "]
        A33[" "] --> AH1[" "]
        A34[" "] --> AI1[" "]
        A35[" "] --> AJ1[" "]
        A36[" "] --> AK1[" "]
        A37[" "] --> AL1[" "]
        A38[" "] --> AM1[" "]
        A39[" "] --> AN1[" "]
        A40[" "] --> AO1[" "]
        A41[" "] --> AP1[" "]
        A42[" "] --> AQ1[" "]
        A43[" "] --> AR1[" "]
        A44[" "] --> AS1[" "]
        A45[" "] --> AT1[" "]
        A46[" "] --> AU1[" "]
        A47[" "] --> AV1[" "]
        A48[" "] --> AW1[" "]
        A49[" "] --> AX1[" "]
        A50[" "] --> AY1[" "]
        A51[" "] --> AZ1[" "]
        A52[" "] --> BA1[" "]
        A53[" "] --> BB1[" "]
        A54[" "] --> BC1[" "]
        A55[" "] --> BD1[" "]
        A56[" "] --> BE1[" "]
        A57[" "] --> BF1[" "]
        A58[" "] --> BG1[" "]
        A59[" "] --> BH1[" "]
        A60[" "] --> BI1[" "]
        A61[" "] --> BJ1[" "]
        A62[" "] --> BK1[" "]
        A63[" "] --> BL1[" "]
        A64[" "] --> BM1[" "]
        A65[" "] --> BN1[" "]
        A66[" "] --> BO1[" "]
        A67[" "] --> BP1[" "]
        A68[" "] --> BZ1[" "]
        A69[" "] --> CA1[" "]
        A70[" "] --> CB1[" "]
    end
    subgraph "Without a spare tyre"
        D1((2BLA790))
        D2((2BLA790A))
    end
    subgraph "Directional tires (if equipped)"
        BZ((4BLA790B))
    end

Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tyres are rotated.

\*NOTICE

Rotate radial tyres that have an asymmetric tread pattern only from front to rear and not from right to left.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \*NOTICE - 1

text_image Tread wear indicator 2GHA5032

Tyre Replacement

If the tyre is worn evenly, a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band 12.7 mm wide (1/2 inch) across the tread. This shows there is less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread left on the tyre. Replace the tyre when this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear across the entyre tread before replacing the tyre.

Wheel Alignment and Tyre Balance

In addition to proper tyre inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to minimize tyre wear. Your vehicle's alignment should be checked every 12 months or 15,000 km (10,000 miles). Your tyres were properly balanced at the factory, but they may need to be rebalanced before they wear out. If you notice a consistent vibration when driving, have your Kia Dealer inspect your tyres. A tyre should always be rebalanced if it has been removed from the wheel.

\* NOTICE

Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.

CAUTION

- Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide for safe ride and handling capability.

Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel that is different from the one that is originally installed on your vehicle. It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to handling failure or rollover and serious injury.

When replacing the tires, be sure to equip all four tires with the tire and wheel of the same size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you nevertheless decide to equip your vehicle with any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Kia for off road driving, you should not use these tires for highway driving.

- The use of any other tyre size or type may seriously affect ride, handling, ground clearance, tyre clearance, and speedometer calibration.

- Driving on worn-out tyres is very hazardous and will reduce braking effectiveness, steering accuracy, and traction.

- It is best to replace all four tyres at the same time. If that is not possible, or necessary, then replace the two front or two rear tyres as a pair. Replacing just one tyre can seriously affect your vehicle's handling.

MAINTENANCE

Wheel Replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset.

CAUTION

A wheel that is not the correct size may adversely affect wheel and bearing life, braking and stopping abilities, handling characteristics, ground clearance, body-to-tyre clearance, snow chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height.

Tyre Size Designation

A tyre's sidewall is marked with a tyre size designation. You will need this information when selecting replacement tyres for your car. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the tyre size designation mean.

Example tyre size designation:

225/75 R16 104H

245/70 R16 107H

225 / 245 - Tyre width in millimeters.

75 / 70 - Aspect ratio. The tyre's section height as a percentage of its width.

R - Tyre construction code (Radial).

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

104/107 - Load Index, a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tyre can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information.

Wheel Size Designation

Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designation mean.

Example wheel size designation:

7.0 JJX16

7.0 - Rim width in inches.

JJ - Rim contour designation.

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tyre Speed Ratings

The chart below shows many of the different speed ratings currently being used for passenger car. The speed rating symbol is part of the tyre size designation on the sidewall of the tyre. This symbol corresponds to that tyre's designed maximum safe operating speed.

Speed Rating SymbolMaximum Speed
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)

KIA Sorento (2005) - Tyre Speed Ratings - 1

text_image Tread wear XXX Traction X Temperature X AN7B07024

Uniform Tyre Quality Grading

Tread wear

Tread wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tyre when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tyre graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the government course as a tyre graded 100.

The relative performance of tyres depends upon the actual conditions of their use. However, performance may differ from the norm because of variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the side-walls of passenger vehicle tyres. The tyres available as standard or optional equipment on Kia vehicles may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B and C. The grades represent the tyres ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tyre marked C may have poor traction performance.

MAINTENANCE

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C. The grades represent the tyres's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tyres to degenerate and reduce tyres life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tyres failure. Grades A and B represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by the law.

WARNING -Tyres Tempe

The temperature grade for this tyres is established for a tyre that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible sudden tyres failure. This can cause loss of vehicle control and serious injury or death.

Checking a tire life

If any tires that are over 6 years based on the manufacturing date, tire strength and performance decline with age naturally (even if the tires are not used like a spare tire). Therefore, the tires should be replaced by new ones including the spare tire. You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall (possibly only on the inside of the wheel), which has DOT marking. DOT is serial numbers on tires, which consist of a combination of numbers and English letters. You can check the manufacturing date to the last four position of the DOT.

The front part of the DOT means a plant code number, tire size and tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.

For example

DOT XXXX XXXX 1602 represents that the tire was produced in the 16th week of 2002.

WARNING

A tire more than 6 years old may cause separation of the cord layers inside the tire leading to loss of vehicle or a serious injury. Therefore, make sure to check the manufacturing date and replace the old tire in 6 years after the tire manufacturing date.

BULB REPLACEMENT

⚠ WARNING - Working on the lights

Prior to working on the light, firmly apply the parking brake and ensure that the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK" position to avoid sudden movement of the vehicle and burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

Use only the bulbs of the specified wattage.

\*NOTICE

Driving rain or washing, Headlamp and Stoplamp could be frosty. It is caused by difference in temperature between the lamp inside and outside like window frostion in rain. It isn't problem. But water soak into or moist the lamp, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer.

Headlight Bulb Replacement

WARNING - Halogen Bulbs

- Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass if broken.

• Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids. Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit. A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlight.

(Continued)

MAINTENANCE

(Continued)

  • If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.
  • Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before handling it.

KIA Sorento (2005) - (Continued) - 1

text_image ① Headlight ② Headlight ③ Front turn signal light ④ ⑤ 2BLA725A 2
  1. Open the hood.
  2. Remove the light assembly from the body of the vehicle loosening the bolts.

KIA Sorento (2005) - (Continued) - 2

text_image Headlight main electrical connector A726A
  1. Disconnect the headlight main electrical connector.

KIA Sorento (2005) - (Continued) - 3

text_image OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE 2BLA726 2
  1. Remove the headlight bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise.

KIA Sorento (2005) - (Continued) - 4

natural_image Technical diagram of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols
  1. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-connector.

  2. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining wire by depressing the end of it and pushing it upward.

KIA Sorento (2005) - (Continued) - 5

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols
  1. Remove the bulb from the head-light assembly.

  2. Install a new headlight bulb and snap the headlight bulb retaining wire into position by aligning the wire with the groove on the bulb.

MAINTENANCE

  1. Connect the headlight bulb socket-connector.
  2. Install the headlight bulb cover by turning it clockwise.
  3. Connect the headlight main connector.
  4. Reinstall the light assembly to the body of the vehicle.

KIA Sorento (2005) - MAINTENANCE - 1

text_image Front turn signal light electrical connector

Front Turn Signal Light Bulb Replacement

  1. Open the hood.
  2. Remove the light assembly from the body of the vehicle removing the bolts.
  3. Disconnect the front turn signal light electrical connector.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Front Turn Signal Light Bulb Replacement - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols
  1. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counter clockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
  2. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it until the tabs on the bulb align with the slot in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

  3. Install a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

  4. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
  5. Connect the front turn signal light electrical connector.
  6. Reinstall the light assembly to the body of the vehicle.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Front Turn Signal Light Bulb Replacement - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a car front and side view with a close-up of a connector (no text or symbols)

Front Fog Light Bulb Replacement
1. Reach your hand into the front bumper below the fog light housing.

  1. Remove the socket from the housing by turning the socket counter clockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the housing.
  2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
  3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
  4. Install the socket in the housing by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the housing. Insert the socket into the housing and turn the socket clockwise.

MAINTENANCE

KIA Sorento (2005) - MAINTENANCE - 1

text_image ■ Map light 2BLA738A ■ Doorn light 2BLA739

KIA Sorento (2005) - MAINTENANCE - 2

text_image ■ Rear cargo area light 2BLA740 ■ Door courtesy light 2BLA750

Interior Lights Bulb Replacement

  1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens from the interior light housing.

CAUTION

Prior to working on the Interior Lights, ensure that the "OFF" button is depressed to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

  1. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
  2. Install a new bulb.
  3. Align the lens tabs with the interior light housing notches and snap the lens into place.

KIA Sorento (2005) - CAUTION - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a car interior panel with no visible text or symbols

Vanity Mirror Light

  1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens from the sunvisor.
  2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
  3. Install a new bulb.
  4. Align the lens tabs with the light housing notches and snap the lens into place.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Vanity Mirror Light - 1

natural_image Top-down line drawing of a car's front dashboard and rear seats (no text or symbols)

Center High-Mounted Stoplight Bulb Replacement

  1. Open the rear hatch.
  2. Remove the trim from the rear hatch after removing fasteners of the both sides on the trim.

KIA Sorento (2005) - Center High-Mounted Stoplight Bulb Replacement - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols
  1. Separate the socket and the lens part by pulling the socket retaining tabs outward.

MAINTENANCE

KIA Sorento (2005) - MAINTENANCE - 1

natural_image Simple line drawing of a mechanical or electrical component with six cylindrical pins and a terminal block (no text or symbols)
  1. Remove the bulbs by pulling them straight out.
  2. Install new bulbs in the socket.
  3. Install the trim securely with the fasteners.

KIA Sorento (2005) - MAINTENANCE - 2

text_image 2BLA7452

License Plate Light

  1. Loosen the lens retaining screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
  2. Remove the lens.
  3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
  4. Install a new bulb.
  5. Reinstall the lens securely with the lens retaining screws.

KIA Sorento (2005) - License Plate Light - 1

text_image StopTall light Turn signal light Back up light 2BLA746A 2

Rear Combination Light Bulb Replacement

  1. Open the rear hatch.

KIA Sorento (2005) - License Plate Light - 2

natural_image Diagram of a car's side profile with an arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols present)
  1. Loosen the light assembly retaining screws with a cross-tip screw-driver.
  2. Slide the rear combination light out to disconnect the rear combination light assembly from the body of the vehicle.

KIA Sorento (2005) - License Plate Light - 3

text_image 2BLA747
  1. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
  2. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

MAINTENANCE

KIA Sorento (2005) - MAINTENANCE - 1

natural_image Line drawing of hands holding a small object with a coiled cable, no text or symbols present
  1. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.
  2. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
  3. Reinstall the light assembly to the body of the vehicle.
  4. Tighten the screws.

KIA Sorento (2005) - MAINTENANCE - 2

text_image 2BLA751

Side turn Signal Light

  1. Remove the light assembly from the vehicle pulling it forward.
  2. Disconnect the bulb electrical connector.
  3. Separate the socket and the lens part by turning the socket counter clockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the lens part.

  4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

  5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
  6. Reassemble the socket and the lens part.
  7. Connect the bulb electrical connector.
  8. Reinstall the light assembly to the body of the vehicle.

LUBRICANT

SPECIFICATIONS

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year's time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant Classification
Engine oil *1GasolineAPI Service SJ, SL or above, ILSAC GF-3 or above
DieselAPI Service CF-4 or above, ACEA B4 or above
Manual transmission fluid API Service GL-4 (SAE 75W-85, fill-for-life)
Automatic 30-40LEI MOBIL D-II
transmission fluid A5SR1 APOLLOIL ATF RED-1
4WD transfer case fluid DEXRON III (fill-for-life)
Front differential fluid API Service GL-5 (SAE 90)
Rear differential fluidwithout LSDAPI Service GL-5 (SAE 90)
with LSDAPI Service GL-5 (SAE 85W-90, INFILREX 33)
Power steering fluid PSF-III
Brake / clutch fluid FMVSS116 DDOT-3 or DOT-4

*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

MAINTENANCE

\* NOTICE

Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating (starting and oil flow). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.

KIA Sorento (2005) - \* NOTICE - 1

bar Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers | Temperature (°C) | -30 | -20 | -10 | 0 | 10 | 20 | 30 | 40 | 50 | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | Gasoline Engine Oil *1 | 20W-50 | 15W-40 | 10W-30 | 5W-20, 5W-30 | 30 | 20W-40 | 15W-40 | 10W-30 | 5W-30 | | Diesel Engine Oil | 30 | 20W-40 | 15W-40 | 10W-30 | 5W-30 | 0W-30 *2 | 0W-30 *2 | 0W-30 *2 | 0W-30 *2 |
  1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20,5W-30 (API SJ, SL / ILSAC GF-3). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

  2. It is only for extreme cold area and to be restricted by driving condition and area. (Especially, not recommended for sustained high loaded and high speed operation.)

EXTERIOR CARE

Exterior General Caution

It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label.

Finish Maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle's finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicle's finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

\* NOTICE

Do not use strong soap, chemical detergents or hot water, and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the body of the vehicle is warm.

CAUTION

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

CAUTION

• Water washing in the engine compartment may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment.
- Pay extreme attention to wash the engine compartment by using water.

MAINTENANCE

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufacturer's instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.

\*NOTICE

- Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.

- Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts. This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.

Finish Damage Repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense.

\* NOTICE

If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or replaced.

Bright-Metal Maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object.
- To protect the surfaces of bright-metal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.
- During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody Maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system, even though they have been treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-body and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month, after off-road driving and at the end of each winter. Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it. The lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not be allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water in these areas can cause rusting.

CAUTION

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water.

MAINTENANCE

Aluminum Wheel Maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated with a clear protective finish.

  • Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on aluminum wheels. They may scratch or damage the finish.
  • Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels after driving on salted roads. This helps prevent corrosion.
  • Avoid washing the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.
  • Do not use any acid detergent. It may damage and corrode the aluminum wheels coated with a clear protective finish.

INTERIOR CARE

Interior General Precautions

Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil from contacting the dashboard because they may cause damage or discoloration. If they do contact the dashboard, wipe them off immediately. See the instructions that follow for the proper way to clean vinyl.

Cleaning the Upholstery and Interior Trim

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, the fabric can be stained and its color can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained.

CAUTION

Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric's appearance and fire-resistant properties.

Cleaning the Lap/shoulder Belt Webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because this may weaken it.

Cleaning the Interior Window Glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container.

\* NOTICE

Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage to the rear window defroster grid.

SPECIFICATIONS

Specifications 8-2

8

SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS

The specifications given here are for general information only. Please check with an authorized Kia dealer for more precise and more up-to-date information.

Dimensions Dimensions

Item mm (in)
Overall length 4,567 [4,625](179.8 [182.1])
Overall width 1,863 [1,884](73.3 [74.2])
Overall height w/o roof rack1,724 (67.9)
Overall height with roof rack1,804 (71.0)
Front tread 1,580 (62.2)
Rear tread 1,580 (62.2)
Wheelbase 2,710 (106.7)
SizeInflation Pressure
Tyre Wheel
225/75R167.0JJ×16240 kPa (35 psi)
245/70R16

Light Bulbs Capacities

Light Bulb Wattage
Headlights (High/Low) 55/55
Front turn signal lights 21
Position lights 5
Front side turn signal lights 5
Front fog lights (if equipped) 27
Rear fog lights (if equipped) 21
Stop and tail lightsexecpt Europe 27/8
Europe 21,5
Rear turn signal lightsexecpt Europe 27
Europe 21
Back-up lightsexecpt Europe 27
Europe 21
High mounted stop light 5×5EA
License plate lights 5
Dome light10
Map light10
Rear cargo area light (if equipped)10
Door courtesy lights (if equipped)5
Vanity mirror lights 3
LubricantVolume (l)Classification
Engine oil ^1 GSL4.3API Service SJ, SL or above, ILSAC GF-3 or above
DSL8.2API SERVICE CF-4 or above, ACEA B4 or above
Transmission fluidA/T30-40LEI11.5MOBIL D-II
A5SR110.0APOLLOIL ATF RED-1
M/T2WD3.2API SERVICE GL-4 (SAE 75W-85, fill for-life)
4WD2.7
4WD transfer case1.42DEXRON III (fill for-life)
Power steering0.85–0.9PSF-III
Front differential1.3API SERVICE GL-5 (SAE 90)
Rear differentialWithout LSD1.3API SERVICE GL-5 (SAE 90)
With LSD1.6API SERVICE GL-6 ( SAE 86V/90, INFLEX35)
CoolantDSL2.4 GSL35 GSLEthylene glycol base for aluminum radiator
10.010.811.0
Brake fluid0.35FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel80-

GSL : Gasoline Engine M/T : Manual Transmission DSL : Diesel Engine A/T : Automatic Transmissio
*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the page 7-56.

INDEX

Index 9-2

9

INDEX

Air Cleaner 7-32

Airbags-Supplemental Restraint System ..... 3-47

Antenna 3-82

Auto Fuel Cutoff Switch 3-64

Automatic Climate Control System 4-80

Automatic Transmission 4-11

Automatic Transmission 7-23

Barrier Net 3-84

Battery 7-35

Before Driving 5-6

Brake System 4-29

Brakes and Clutch 7-20

Bulb Replacement 7-45

CD Auto Changer 3-83

Cruise Control System 4-38

Cup Holder 3-70

Defroster 4-70

Door Locks 3-8

9-2

Electrical Circuit Protection 6-7

Emergency Starting 6-4

Emission Control System 5-4

Engine Compartment 7-12

Engine Cooling System 7-17

Engine Oil and Oil Filter 7-14

Exterior Care 7-57

Four Wheel Drive(4WD) 4-19

Front / Rear Differential 7-28

Front Seat 3-13

Fuel Filler Lid 3-61

Fuel Filter and Sedimenter (For Diesel) ..... 7-31

Fuel Requirements 5-2

Gauges 4-46

Hazard Warning Flasher 4-71

Hood 3-60

How to Use This Manual 1-2

INDEX

If You Have a Flat Tyre 6-20

Ignition Switch 4-2

Immobilizer System 3-5

Instrument Cluster (Diesel Engine) 4-45

Instrument Cluster (Gasoline Engine) 4-43

Instrument Panel Overview 2-3

Interior and Exterior Overview 2-2

Interior Care 7-61

Interior Features 3-78

Interior Lights 3-68

Keys 3-2

Label Information 5-43

Lighting 4-61

Limited Slip Differential 4-29

Lubricant Specifications 7-55

Lubricants and Fluids 7-30

Luggage Center Box 3-89

Luggage Net 3-87

Maintenance Services 7-2

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions . . . 7-8

Manual Climate Control System 4-72

Manual Transmission 7-26

Manual Transmission 4-9

Mirrors 3-64

Multi-Meter 4-55

Normal Maintenance Schedule 7-4

Overheating 6-3

Overloading 5-42

Owner Maintenance 7-9

Parking Brake 7-21

Power Steering 7-22

Rear Hatch 3-58

Rear Seat 3-21

Remote Keyless Entry 3-3

INDEX

Road Warning 6-2

Roofrack 3-77

Safety Belts 3-25

Special Driving Conditions 5-9

Specifications 8-2

Starting the Diesel Engine 4-7

Starting the Gasoline Engine 4-4

Steering Wheel 4-35

Storage Compartment 3-71

Suggestions for Economical Operation ..... 5-8

Sunglass Holder 3-73

Sunroof 3-74

Tyres and Wheels 7-38

Tonneau Cover 3-88

Towing 6-14

Trailer Towing 5-33

Transfer Case (4WD) 7-29

Using Four-Wheel Drive 5-15

Vehicle Break-In Process 1-3

Vehicle Handling Instruction 1-3

Vehicle Identification Number 5-42

Warnings and Indicators 4-48

Windows 3-11

Windshield Defrosting and

Defogging (Automatic type) 4-90

Windshield Defrosting and

Defogging (Manual type) 4-88

Wiper Blades 7-33

Wipers and Washers 4-66

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : KIA

Model : Sorento (2005)

Category : Car